Rittal SK 3302.series Operating instructions

R i t t a l GmbH & Co. KG

Auf dem Stützelberg

D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

Service - Tel.: (++49) - (0)2772 / 505-1855

Service - Fax: (++49) - (0)2772 / 505-1850

Installation / Operating Instructions

Recooling unit

3318.xxx

®

For exact type designation see type plate

Important:

It is mandatory to read these operating instructions prior to commissioning and to keep these for future use. The manufacturer cannot accept any liability for damage or operating problems resulting from nonobservance of these operating instructions. The right to make technical changes for further development is reserved.

FRIEDHELM L O H GROUP 1

Table of contents:



D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

4. Installation............................................................................................................................... 5

6. Start-up ................................................................................................................................... 6

7. Hydrological data .................................................................................................................... 7

8. Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 9

9. Shutting down / disposing the cooling system...................................................................... 10

11. Appendix ............................................................................................................................... 13

®

Intended use of the cooling system

The system is used for the cooling of water or of a water-glycol mixture.

When using other media (e.g. de-ionised water) please refer to the technical data contained in the appendix, or contact the manufacturer. The limit values given in the technical data must in no case be exceeded.

Warning:

The use of the system for cooling inflammable or explosive substances is prohibited:

Explosion hazard.




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

General notes

These operating instructions are containing basic notes which must be observed during commissioning, operation and maintenance. It is mandatory, therefore, for the fitter and the responsible operating staff/ operator to read these prior to commissioning. They must always be available at the location of the system. It is a must to observe not only the general safety notes given in this section, but also the special safety notes included in the other sections.

Qualification of personnel and training

The personnel for operation, maintenance, inspection, and installation must have the appropriate qualification for this work. The scope of responsibility, competence, and supervision of the personnel must be defined precisely by the operator.

Risks in case of nonobservance of safety notes

In case of nonobservance of the safety notes hazards may occur for personnel, as well as for the environment and the system proper. Nonobservance of safety notes will entail loss of any rights to claim damages.

Safety consciousness at work

The safety notes listed in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations for the prevention of accidents, and also any further internal work, operating, safety regulations must be observed.

Safety notes for the operating company / operator

Any existing contact hazard protection for moving parts must not be removed from plants being in operation.

Hazards due to electrical energy must be excluded. ( → For details on this see, for instance, the VDE regulations and those of the local utilities).

Safety notes for maintenance, inspection, and installation work

On principle, cleaning and maintenance work must be carried out only with the plant in standstill condition. It is mandatory to follow the procedures described in the operating instructions for shut-down of the plant.

Warning! Prior to maintenance work the recooling unit must be switched voltage-free at the input end.

Immediately after completion of this work the safety and protective system must be attached again or their function restored.

Unauthorised modification and production of spare parts

Any modification or change of the plant is allowed only as agreed with the manufacturer. Original spare parts and accessories approved by the manufacturer enhance safety. The use of other parts can make void the liability for the consequences arising from this.

Unallowable operating modes

The operational reliability of the system supplied is ensured only in case of intended use. The limit values given in the technical data must in no case be exceeded.

Health hazards originating from the refrigerant

There is only very little risk to the health originating from the refrigerant. Narcotic properties are met only in case of very high concentrations. Following direct effect of very high concentrations this is eliminated again very quickly via the lungs. The refrigerant can have a certain irritating effect on skin and mucous membranes. The effect of liquid refrigerant on the skin may cause frostbite. In the presence of open fire or hot surfaces refrigerants may decompose and form poisonous decomposition products (e.g. hydrogen chloride, phosgene).

The refrigerant volatises when escaping in gaseous form into the open. An intentional discharge is not allowed.

Refrigerating systems must be positioned in a way that they do not become damaged due to internal traffic and transport processes.

®




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

3. Transport and handling

ATTENTION:

Please note when using water refrigerant!

When the recooling unit is stored or transported at temperatures below freezing point the consumer circuit must be drained completely and if necessary flushed with a water-glycol mixture for preventing frost damage.

This also applies to the cooling circuit for water-cooled condensers.

Until first start-up the cooling system may be transported only in its original packaging material. In case of damage the manufacturer must be informed immediately. If the unit is being moved inside the works all connections must be disconnected from the unit. Moving of the unit must be done in a manner that no damage can occur. If damage should occur in spite of these notes, the unit must be inspected prior to renewed start-up by an expert and be repaired if necessary.

A possibly existing tank must be emptied prior to transportation.

When preventing the recooling system the weight specified on the type plate must be taken into consideration. A fork lift truck or transport device of the appropriate carrying capacity should be used.

For preventing damage on transport:

• The unit may be transported in upright position only.

• Suspend the recooling unit for transport only at the lifting rings provided for this purpose or on the pallet supplied with it.

• Strong shocks during transport must be prevented.

®




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

4. Installation

Conditions for Installation

• The site of the recooling unit should be, if possible, directly next to the consumers for avoiding long distances and line losses connected with this. Line losses are mainly caused by:

- Pressure loss in line system caused by piping resistance and separate resistance due to shut-off fittings and pipe bends.

- Heat transfer at non-insulated pipelines due to prevailing temperature differential along the piping system.

• The site for the recooling unit chosen should be such that – in case of service intervals or repair work - easy access is possible at any time. This facilitates maintenance and repair.

• It must be assured that the fans are not working in "air short-circuit". Air short-circuits may cause loss of performance of the recooling unit. If ventilation of the room in which the recooling unit is placed is insufficient room temperature may increase due to accumulated waste heat. This may cause a decrease of performance of the cooling unit.

IMPORTANT:

When installing the recooling unit attention should be paid to the following:

• With air-cooled recooling units the following minimum distances to wall and ceiling must be maintained:

Wall:

Minimum 1 x height of condenser

Ceiling:

Minimum 3 x height of condenser

• The connection of a duct for fresh and exhaust air is allowed only following prior release by the manufacturer →loss of performance (air-cooled recooling unit).

• Do not place the recooling unit in the vicinity of a heating device →loss of performance.

• The recooling unit may be positioned only on level firm surfaces . The maximum deviation from the vertical is 2° ensuring a safe stand.

• The consumer to be cooled is to be connected to the recooling unit by means of insulated piping or hose connections.

• If the consumer is positioned on a higher level than the recooling unit a non-return valve is to be installed in the feed line and a solenoid valve in the return line →to prevent the tank from flowing over.

• With recooling units to be sited in the open under a roof the minimum outside temperature should be taken from the technical data.

• With recooling units (for water) with a tank at below-zero temperatures a water-glycol mixture of the

specified ratio, Æ see technical data, is to be filled in.

• When it is possible to shut-off the consumer circuit an appropriate bypass must be provided to protect the pump.

• The circulation pump must never run dry Æ otherwise the pump will be damaged.

®




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

5. Electrical

It is mandatory to observe the following notes:

• The electrical connection, in accordance with the type plate , may be made only by authorised specialist personnel.

• Recooling units must always be integrated into the potential equalisation.

• The conductor cross sections of the power cables must be selected according the rated current (see nameplate).

• The max. voltage drop must not exceed 10%.

• With three-phase current systems the connection must be made with a clockwise rotating field.

• The cooling system must be connected to the mains by means of a disconnecting device ensuring a minimum contact gap of 3 mm in switched-off condition.

• With a transformer installed (option) one must check whether it is connected to the correct terminal (on primary side).

6. Start-up

•

When connecting the recooling unit to the fluid circuit to be cooled the latter should always be flushed. This procedure prevents any depositions existing in the fluid circuit to contaminate the recooling unit which may, under circumstances, cause damage to or failure of the internal pump.

• Unpack unit, place it on a level surface and align it using a spirit-level.

• With air-cooled recooling units the siting selected must be such that no “air short-circuiting”

(hot air exit Å Æ air intake condenser) can occur.

• Observe allowed ambient temperature and wall distance.

• Connect to mains.

• Make media connections.

• Make cooling water connections (water-cooled condenser).

• Nominal width of piping must correspond at least to the nominal width of media connections at unit.

• Fill medium into the unit.

• For closed systems: please prepare an admission pressure of 1.2-2 bar.

• Start up recooling unit.

• Check direction of rotation of motors.

• Vent piping, top up medium.

• Activate cooling water circuit (water-cooled condenser).

• Check connection lines and pipe connections during start-up phase for leak-tightness.

Prolonged standstill

If a prolonged standstill of the system is intended, drain the medium circuit completely. For renewed start-up of the system the same checks are be carried out as with initial start-up.


®



D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

7. Hydrological data

In order to prevent problems in the water circuit (this also applies to water-cooled units) it is mandatory to comply with the VEB Cooling water guidelines (VGB-R 455 P).

Antifreeze component in cooling water: see technical data

Cooling water and/ or cold water must not cause sediments of water scale or lose precipitation. It should also be of low hardness, in particular of low carbonate hardness. Particularly with cooling by circulating operation carbonate hardness should not be too high. On the other hand, the water should not be soft to an extent that materials are attacked. When the cooling water is recooled the salt content should not increase due to evaporation to an extent that with increasing concentration of dissolved substances the electric conductivity increases, making the water more corrosive. Therefore, not only a corresponding amount of fresh water must always be added, but also a part of the enriched water must be taken out.

Note:

We have to point out again that without water treatment it is only seldom possibly to achieve satisfactory conditions. The water treatment by the client must ensure that even with extreme conditions depositions and corrosion are avoided.

IMPORTANT

Only fill in distilled or DI water in recooling units specified for this purpose (see data sheet).

Treatment and/ or maintenance of the water in recooling units

The cooling water must meet particular conditions, depending on the installation to be cooled. Depending on its contamination and size and design of the recooling unit a suitable process will then be employed for water treatment and/ or maintenance. The most frequent types of contamination and normal processes for dealing with these in industrial cooling are:

• Mech. contamination:

Filtering of the water using screen filters, gravel filters, cartridge filters, precoated filters

• Hardness too high:

Softening of the water by ion exchange

• Moderate content of mechanical contamination and hardness constituents:

Softening of the water by ion exchange

• Moderate content of chemical contamination:

Inoculation of the water with passivators and/ or inhibitors

• Biological contamination, slime bacteria, and algae:

Inoculation of the water with biocides

®




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

Check water quality regularly.

Evaporation processes at the system water surface have a thickening effect on the system water.

Remove thickened water from the system by water exchange, in order to keep water values within the required limits.

The properties of the water used should not deviate from the hydrological data listed below. pH value 7 - 8,5

Carbonate hardness

Free carbon dioxide

Associated carbon dioxide

Aggressive carbon dioxide

Sulphides

Oxygen

3 - 8° dH

8 - 15 mg/dm

3

8 - 15 mg/dm

3

0 mg/dm 3

Zero

< 10 mg/dm³

Chloride ions

Sulphate ion

Nitrates and nitrites

< 50 mg/dm³

< 250 mg/dm³

< 10 mg/dm³

CSB (chemical oxygen consumption) <7 mg/dm³

Ammonia

Iron

< 5 mg/dm³

Manganese

Conductivity

< 0.2 mg/dm³

< 0.2 mg/dm³

200 – 2200 µS/cm

Residue on evaporation

Potassium permanganate consumption

Suspended matter

< 500 mg/dm³

< 25 mg/dm³

< 3 mg/dm³

3 – 15 mg/dm³

> 15 mg/dm³

Split stream cleaning recommended

Continuous cleaning recommended

®




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

8. Maintenance

The cooling circuit which is a hermetically sealed system has been filled at works with the required volume of refrigerant, tested for leak tightness, and subjected to a functional trial run.

Attention!

Prior to maintenance work the recooling unit must be switched voltage-free at the input end.

Important!

• For ensuring proper function of the recooling unit it is a must to take care that the laminae of the air-cooled condenser are kept clean.

• Oil-containing ambient air in combination with dust will cause increased dirt deposition on the condenser laminae. Here, the following should be observed:

Simply sweeping the outside with the fan running will not afford thorough cleaning. It is absolutely necessary to use oil-solving agents, like cleaner's naphtha, or similar, for cleaning and we recommend using a spray gun for penetrating into the depth of the condenser. When doing this, functional components, mounted in the lower part, must be well covered in order to remove the flushed contamination and to prevent damage to surrounding components. Cleaning should be done at regular intervals with the frequency depending on the degree of contamination in the room where the system is put up.

With cooling of / with water or similar media please pay attention always to:

• Solid matter residues (clean used filters regularly, if applicable)

• Algae and depositions

• Corrosion may cause irreversible damage to the recooling unit. Such residues will always have the effect that the performance of the recooling unit can suffer. The manufacturer's guarantee and liability become void in cases of incorrect use and treatment of the recooling unit. In such cases we do not accept any liability for damage.

®




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

Summary of service activities recommended by us

Compressor

• No servicing is required with fully hermetic compressors.

Fan (air-cooled recooling unit)

• Check noise level

Æ ½ year

Condenser (air-cooled recooling unit)

• Clean laminae by compressed air or by sweeping

Æ 2 months

• Clean filter mat

Æ 4 weeks

Condenser (water-cooled recooling system)

Please note the special data in the appendix

Inspection glass cooling circuit (unit-specific)

• Check moisture indicator, green for dry = OK, yellow for moist, possible moisture in cooling circuit or condenser defect

Æ ½ year

Consumer medium

• Check medium circuit for contamination and possible solid matter (chips or similar)

Æ 4 weeks

Tank, components, and all connections (piping, valves and fittings, hoses) of consumer circuit

• Check for leaks

Æ 1 week

Filling level medium

• Check for sufficient filling level, top up if necessary

Æ 1 week

Electrical connections

• Check terminals and connections

Æ ½ year

9. Shutting down / disposing the cooling system

Shutting down / disposing the recooling unit may be carried out only by authorised expert personnel.

Because the refrigerant will volatise when escaping in gaseous form into the open intentional blowing off is not permitted. The refrigerant and the components of the cooling unit must be disposed of in accordance with the rules of the trade and local regulations. The same applies to the oil in the compressor and possibly present waste water.


®



D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

10. General fault analysis

Insufficient cooling performance resp. low air outlet temperature from condenser at ambient temperature.

Refrigerant shortage

Increased condenser

pressure

When the allowed condenser pressure is exceeded the high-pressure limiter will trip and switch off the compressor.

An indicator light or a fault indicator (option) gives a fault message.

- Refrigerant shortage is announced by a marked drop of cooling performance. The cooling circuit is leaking in this case.

Remarks

- Eliminate leakage and top up cooling circuit again.

The cooling circuit may be repaired by a specialist firm only. In case of cooling circuit problems please contact the manufacturer.

- Too high ambient temperature (see technical data)

- Nonobservance of required distances

(see siting)

- A specialist is needed for manual resetting of the highpressure limiter

Evaporator pressure

If the required evaporator pressure is not reached the low-pressure limiter (option) trips and switches off the compressor.


Compressor is continuously being switched on and off

- Too high feed medium temperature (see technical data)

- Water-flow controller defective (with watercooled units only)

- Contamination of cooling water inlet / outlet

(with water-cooled units only)

- Cooling water temperature outside limits

(with water-cooled units only, see technical data)

- Cooling water shortage (with water-cooled units only, see technical data)

- Too low ambient temperature (see technical data)

- Expansion valve or capillary tube defective

- Operation solenoid valve defective (if existing, see wiring plan)

- When using evaporating coils in tank: not enough medium in tank

- The evaporating coils must be covered completely by the medium.

- Cooling performance of recooling system too high

- Differential gap of controller too small - Check parameter setting

- Medium temperature too high - Check temperature of medium

®




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

Remarks

Unit does not work

- Contactor defective

Compressor, pump, and fan are working

- Condenser or air inlet filter heavily contaminated

Cooling performance low

Current input high

- Air short-circuit: hot air is taken in again because of obstacles at place of siting

- Check function and rating of current supply.

- Cleaning without using any aggressive agents

- Remove obstacles or re-direct air flow

Insufficient cooling effect and condensate formation at condenser

Compressor without function


-

-

Volume flow through evaporator too low

Thermal stop of compressor (motor circuitbreaker)

- Check function of pump

- Check heat loss of hydraulic circuit

- Condenser pressure too high

(contaminated air filter or condenser)

Fan without function

An indicator light or a fault indicator (option) gives a fault message

Pump without function


No medium circulation


- Thermal stop of fans (motor circuit-breaker)

- Thermal stop of pumps (motor circuitbreaker)

- Valve shut possibly

- Ambient temperature too high

(>45° C)

- High pressure loss (Obstacles in area of air outlet).

- Compare pressure of pump with data on nameplate

- Cooling insufficient (air inlet contaminated)

- Open the valve in question

While in continuous operation, the recooling system is in stable operating condition. The recooling system keeps the medium feed temperature at the set desired value.

Possible causes for deviation from desired value could be:

- Cooling demand too high (see technical data)

- Too high ambient temperature (see technical data)

- Required distances are not held (see technical data) contaminated

- Refrigerant shortage (bubble formation in inspection glass)

- Medium level too low in tank (not with once-through cooler)

- Medium temperature set too low (see technical data) set incorrectly

®




D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

11. Appendix

• Technical data

• P+ID Schematics

• Wiring plan

• Description of components

®


Technische Daten

Technical data

Caractéristiques techniques

Dati tecnici



D – 3 5 7 4 5 H e r b o r n

Service - Tel.: (++49) - (0)2772 505-1855

Service - Fax: (++49) - (0)2772 505-1850

SK3335.069, WA Nr.: 6952001/001, Masch.-Nr. 06 06 19

Deutsch English Français Italiano

Netzfrequenz nominale

Mains frequency Fréquence du réseau

Tensione nominale

Frequenza di rete

400 V / 3~ / PE

50 Hz

12 A tension de contrôle nominale

Controlli la tensione

24VDC / 230 VAC

Anschlussleistung démarrage

Connected load Puissance connectée frigorifique

Corrente di spunto

Potenza allacciata

Potenza frigorifera

Kältemittel Refrigerant Agent réfrigérant Refrigerante

3 x I

Nenn

4200 W

6000 W

T

W1

= +18°C / T

U

= +32°C

R407 C

Kältemittelmenge Refrigerant quantity

Temperaturbereich Umgebung

Temperature range ambient

Tank air

Tank capacity

Quantité de réfrigérant

Zone de température de l'air ambiant

Capacité de réservoir

Quantità di refrigerante

Gamma di temperatura dell'aria ambiente

Volume utile vasca

3,5kg

+10°C bis +43C

150 ltr.

Geräuschpegel Noise level Niveau sonore Livello di rumorosità

70 dB(A)

Gewicht Weight Poids Peso

Dimensions Dimensions Dimensioni

280 kg

Tiefe Depth Profondeur Profondità

1200 mm

2000 mm

600 mm

Temperatur

Vorlauf

Temperature outlet

Température vidange

Temperatura scarico

Hysterese Hysteresis Hystérésis Isteresi

+18°C

+2 K

Nennförderleistung

Rohranschluss,

Vorlauf

Rohranschluss,

Rücklauf

Rated delivery power

Pipe connection, outlet

Pipe connection, inlet

Puissance nominale de débit

Connexion de tuyau, vidange

Connexion de tuyau, admission

Potenza nominale di flusso

Connessione tubo, scarico

Connessione tubo, immissione

21,5 ltr./min bei

0,5bar absolut

1 ¼“ IG

1 ¼“ IG

Frostschutzanteil Anti-frost agent content

Part de l'antigel

Wir empfehlen: We recommend: Fournisseur préconisé:

Percentuale antigelo

Nostra direttiva interna:

30 % max

Clariant

Typ Type Type Tipo Antifrogen N

®

FRIEDHELM L O H GROUP

0 1

Plant designation

Maschine number

Drawing number

Incoming supply

Control voltage max. power supply max. current supply

2 3 4 5

RITTAL GmbH & Co. KG

Auf dem Sttzelberg

D-35745 Herborn http://www.rittal.de

SK 3335.169

06 06 19

06 06 19

6

3 x 400V/PE

24VDC/ 230VAC

4,2kW

12A

Project leader :

Last change :

Last processor :

22.06.06

TRA

nderung Datum Name

Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.

Rittal GmbH & Co. KG


D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Cover

7 8 9

ESSE002D

Number of pages 12

Zeichnungsnummer: 06 06 19

2

=

+

Bl.

1

12

Bl.

0 1 2

Table of contents

6

7

8

4

5

9

10

11

12

2

3

Page

1

Name of the page

Cover

Table of contents

Main current

Control circuit

Thermostat

Pump control

Water level control

Fault signal

Flowdiagram

Clamp plan X1

Stckliste

Stckliste

3 4 5 6 7 addition of page Date

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

22.06.06

8

Processor

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

TRA

9

ESSJ010D

X

X

X

X

X

1


Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Table of contents


3

=

+

Bl.

2

12

Bl.

0

-Q0

1 3 5

L1 L2 L3

1 2 3

-Q1

4,5-6,3A

Set: 6A

1 3

2 4

5

13 21

14

5.7

8.1

22

6

4 5 6 7

-Q2

3,5-5A

Ieinst.: 4A

1

2

3

4

5

13 21

6.8

14 22

8.2

6

8 9

L1

/4.0

L3

/4.0

N

/4.0

-K1

5.7

1

2

3

4

5

6

X1 1 2 3 N

PE

PE

L1 L2 L3 N PE

Input

3x400V / PE /50 Hz

PE

X1 5 6 7 PE

-M1

R407C

U1 V1

3

M

~

W1

PE

Compressor

MTZ 28-4

U:400V 50Hz

I:5,5A

P:3,2KW

2


Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.

PE

X1 8 9 10 PE

-M2

U1 V1

3

M

~

W1

PE

Fan

S 4 D 350

U:400V 50Hz

I:0,34A

P:0,16KW



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Main current

-K2

6.8

5,5KW

1

2

3

4

5

6

Sp1

/6.0

Sp2

/6.0

PE

X1 11 12 13 PE

-M3

U1 V1

3

M

~

W1

PE

CV/+

0V/-

X1 38 39

Pump

MHIE 205-2G

U:400V

I: 4A

P:1,5KW

0...10V Signal

Pump


4

=

+

Bl.

3

12

Bl.

0

3.9/

L1

3.9/

L3

3.9/

N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-F1

500mA

-F2

500mA

-T1

EKL 1,0 0V 400V

0V 24V

24VDC

2A

-

-

-F1

2A

2

+

+

1

-F3

2A

-F4

2A

-K3

6.4

1

2

3

4

-PE1

X1 42 43 for extern signals

3


Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.

24VDC

/5.0

0VDC

/5.0



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Control circuit

X1

14

-M4

L1

1

M

~

15

N

PE

PE

PE

Vakuum pump


9

L02

/7.0

N

/7.0

5

=

+

Bl.

4

12

Bl.

0

4.3/

24VDC

1 2 3 4 5

-U1

8.0

MPRA-SMK...-F

A1 11 21 31

.

Stufe 1

A2 12

.

.

14

Stufe 2

.

22

.

.

24

Stufe 3

.

32

.

34

.

F F X1

20 21

-B1

KTY10-6

1

2

-Y1

X1 40

X1

41

X1 16

-P1

P78B

+ -

ND P

A

PE

PE

B

X1 18

- +

HD P

C

X1 17

PE

D

X1

19

PE

4.3/

0VDC

Thermostat

Pressostat

4


Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.

Probe



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Thermostat

6 7 8 9

24VDC

/6.0

F3

/8.2

F4

/8.2

F5

/8.2

F6

/8.2

-K2

6.8

13

14

38

-Q1

3.3

13

14

-K1

A1

A2

-V1

1

3

5

2 3.3

4 3.3

6 3.3

Compressor


0VDC

/6.0

6

=

+

Bl.

5

12

Bl.

0

5.9/

24VDC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

24VDC

/7.0

F2

/8.2

-U2

KS41-1

(L)

(N)

1

2

3

(OUT1)

(OUT2)

(OUT3)

7/-

8

(OUT3)

(OUT3)

9/+

4

5

6

(INP2)

(INP2)

(di1)

(INP1)

(INP1)

(INP1)

10

11

12

13

14

15

X1

22

X1

23

X1

26

-S1

PN 7009 1

X1

3

27 X1

2

28 X1

4

29

-K10T

.5

15

16

Verz

-S2

IFM

TYP: SI10xx

18

/7.8

X1

ELEKTRONISCHER

STROEMUNGSWAECHTER

( Oeffner )

HI-Teach

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LO-Teach

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Schaltpunkt

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Fernabgleich

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4 1 3 2

30 31 32

-K11T

.6

15

16

-K5

7.4

18

21

22

X1 24

-B2

1

4-20mA

3

25

0-30bar

-Q2

3.7

13

14

3.8/

Sp2

3.8/

Sp1

5.9/

0VDC

-K3

A1

A2

-V3 -K10T

A1

A2

-K11T

A1 B1

A2

-K2

A1

A2

-V2

Remote

Regulator for pump M3

5


Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

1

3

2 4.7

4 4.8

15

18 .6

16 .5

Pressure control

-B2

Pressure control

S1

Vakuum pump

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Pump control

Funktion: R/ 3s

1

3

5

13

2 3.6

4 3.7

6 3.7

14 5.7

Float switch

-S2

Pump


0VDC

/7.0

=

+

Bl.

7

6

12

Bl.

0

6.9/

24VDC

4.9/

L02

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-K12T

.3

15

16 18

-K7

.7

11

14

6.5/

Verz

8

-K7

.7

21

24

9

24VDC

/8.0

-U3

RIA 452

L

N

41 51 44 54

.

Relais 1

42

.

.

43

.

Relais 2

52

.

.

53

.

Relais 3

45

.

.

46

.

Relais 4

55

.

56

.

PE

81

82

11

12

PE

X1 33 34

-B3

+

S1

1

2

-H1 weiá

-H2 gelb

-K12T

A1

A2

-H3 rot

-K5

A1

A2

4.9/

N

6.9/

0VDC

6

nderung Datum

Function: WU 1s

Water level indicator

Water level "full"

> 40%

15

Water level

"water level indicator"

< 10%

18 .7

16 .7

21

Water level

"dry run"

< 0%

Name

Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.

22 6.8

Water level sensor



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Water level control

-K7

A1

A2

11

21

14 .7

24 .8

Warning horn

RESET

Zeichnungsnummer:

H5

Warning horn dry run

06 06 19

0VDC

/8.0

8

=

+

Bl.

7

12

Bl.

0

7.9/

24VDC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-U1

5.2

MPRA-SMK...-F

7

7.9/

0VDC

-Q1

3.4

21

22

-Q2

3.7

21

22

5.9/

F6

5.9/

F5

5.9/

F4

5.9/

F3

6.9/

F2

F1 F2 F3

Fault signal modul

F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

41

42 44

F1: Motor circuit switch

F2: Float control

F3: Temperature low

F4: Temperature to high

F5: Low pressure

F6: High pressure

F7:-

F8:-

F9:-

F10:_

-K6

A1

A2

-H6


Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.

X1 35

-K6

.5

11

12

36

14

37

Fault signal contact

11

14 .8

12 .8

Fault signal lamp



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Fault signal


9

9

=

+

Bl.

8

12

Bl.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1.1

-M1

-P1

HD ND

-M2

5.1

2.1

Vakuum pump

3.1

Y1

4.1

FC

1.1

PIS

IN

R 1 1/4"

LIS

R 1 1/2"

R 1"

Vakuum

PIS

R 1/2"

Vakuum meter

R 1"

21,5l/min.

Fill 1" IG

TC

-U1

-M3

-B1

In 1 1/4" IG

Out 1 1/4" IG

8


Datum

Bearb.

TRA

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Flowdiagram


10

=

+

Bl.

9

12

Bl.

0

Clamp plan

1 2 3

Name of terminal block X1

Cable name

WX1/-B1

WX1/-B1 wire cable type

1

2

-P1

-K2

-U1

-U1

-B1

-B1

-U2

-B2

-B2

-S1

-U2

-K3

Target- name

L1

L2

L3

N

Connect

-M1

-M1

-M1

-M2

-M2

-M2

-M4

-M4

-K11T

-K11T

-B3

-B3

U1

V1

W1

U1

V1

W1

L1

N

A

13

F5

F6

1

2

2

A1

3

1

1

1

B1

A2

-

+

Cl.-

Nb.

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

PE

16

17

18

13

PE

14

15

10

PE

11

12

7

PE

8

9

N

PE

5

6

1

2

3

39

40

41

42

43

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

Brigde

4 5 6 7 8

-U3

-U3

-K6

-K6

-K6

-U2

-U2

-U1

-T1

-T1

-U2

-K10T

-S1

-S1

-S1

-S2

Target name

L1

L2

L3

N

-Q0

-Q0

-Q0

-K3

-K2

-K2

-K2

-K3

-K3

-U1

-P1

-P1

-P1

-U1

-U1

-U1

-K1

-K1

-K1

-K1

-K1

-K1

Connect

L1

L2

L3

3

Cable name

2

4

6

2

4

14

C

B

F

31

D

F

2

4

6

2

4

6

14

7/-

9/+

14

11

81

11

12

+

-

13

A1

3

2

4

1 wire

Cable type

Side/

Path Function text

5.3

5.5

5.5

6.1

6.1

6.2

6.2

6.3

3.7

3.7

4.7

4.8

4.8

5.2

5.2

5.3

3.3

3.3

3.4

3.4

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.0

3.0

3.1

3.1

3.1

3.3

3.3

8.7

8.8

8.8

3.8

3.8

5.1

5.1

4.2

4.2

6.3

6.4

6.4

6.6

6.6

6.7

7.6

7.6

for extern signals

=

=

=

Fan

=

=

=

Pump

=

Input

=

=

=

=

Compressor

=

=

=

Vakuum pump

=

=

=

=

Pressostat

=

Probe

=

Remote

=

Pressure control -B2

=

Pressure control S1

=

=

=

Float switch -S2

=

=

Water level sensor

=

Fault signal contact

=

=

0...10V Signal Pump

=

9


Datum

Gepr.

Norm

22.06.06

Bearb.

TRA

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Clamp plan X1


9

ESSK016D

11

=

+

Bl.

10

12

Bl.

0 1 2 3

-K3

-K5

-K6

-K7

-H3

-H6

-K1

-K2

-F3

-F4

-H1

-H2

-B2

-B3

-F1

-F2

-M2

-M3

-M4

-P1

-Q0

-K10T

-K11T

-K12T

-M1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

List of parts

COMPONENT AMOUNT DESIGNATION

DRUCKTRANSMITTER 1/4"

Messwertaufnehmer

Feinsicherungshalter 5x20mm, 2,5qmm




Leuchtmelder mit glatter Linse (ws)

Leuchtmelder mit glatter Linse (ge)

Leuchtmelder mit glatter Linse (rt)

Leuchtmelder mit glatter Linse (rt)

SCHšTZ, 230 V,50/60 Hz, 5,5 KW,1S,

SCHšTZ, 230 V,50/60 Hz, 5,5 KW,1S,

SCHšTZ 24VDC, 5,5kW, 1S

Relais RSS214-24VDC

Relais RSS214-24VDC

Relais RSS214-24VDC

Zeitrelais MRF 24VAC/DC-110-240VAC



Kompressor MTZ28-4

Lfter S4D-350-AP08-01

Pumpe MHIE 205/2G mit Frequenzumrichter

VAKUUM-PUMPE N026ANE

Duo-Druckw„chter P 78 B

Hauptschalter 9,5kW, 25A, Schwarz

10


Datum

Gepr.

Norm

21.06.06

Bearb.

TRA

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.

4



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

5

Stckliste

6

ORDER NUMBER


942205-9000

ASK 1

ASK 1

ASK 1

ASK 1

3SB32 44-6AA60

3SB32 44-6AA30

3SB32 44-6AA20

3SB32 44-6AA20

3RT10 17-1AP01

3RT10 17-1AP01

3RT1017-1BB41

RSS214-24VDC

RSS214-24VDC

RSS214-24VDC

MRF

MRF

MRF

MTZ28-4

S4D-350-AP08-01

MHIE 205/2G


P 78 B

3LD2103-0TK51

IDENTIFICATION


MULTICAP T DC11TEN

ASK 1

ASK 1

ASK 1

ASK 1

3SB32 44-6AA60

3SB32 44-6AA30

3SB32 44-6AA20

3SB32 44-6AA20

3RT1017-1AP01

3RT1017-1AP01

3RT1017-1BB41

RSS214-24VDC

RSS214-24VDC

RSS214-24VDC

MRF

MRF

MRF

MTZ28-4

S4D-350-AP08-01

MHIE 205/2G


P 78 B

3LD2103-0TK51

7

Zeichnungsnummer:

8 9

NIL_133E / 02.04.03

SUPPLIER

PAGE

PATH

Wilo 6.1

Endress&Hauser 7.5

Weidmueller 4.2

Weidmueller 4.2

Weidmueller 4.5

4.5

Weidmueller

Siemens 7.2

Siemens 7.2

7.4

Siemens

Siemens

Siemens

Siemens

Siemens

Tele

Tele

Tele

Conta-Clip

Conta-Clip

Conta-Clip

Maneurop

EBM

Wilo

KNF

PENN

Siemens

8.6

5.7

6.8

6.4

7.4

8.5

7.7

6.5

6.6

7.3

3.3

3.4

3.6

4.7

5.2

3.0

06 06 19

12

=

+

Bl.

11

12

Bl.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

-U2

-U3

-V1

-V2

-V3

-Y1

-Y1

S1

-S2

-T1

-U1

-Q1

-Q2

-S1

S1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

List of parts

COMPONENT AMOUNT DESIGNATION ORDER NUMBER

IDENTIFICATION

Motorschutzschalter 3RV 1011-1GA10 /4,5-6,3

Motorschutzschalter 3RV 1011-1FA10 /3,5-5

Drucksensor PN7009

™ffnerelement 3SB34 00 -0C

3SB30 00-0AA71

Stroemungswaechter SI 1000

Netzteil EKL 1,0

Temperaturregler MPRA-SMK-A-3-KT-F / 24UCV

Temp. regler KS 41

PROZESSANZEIGER

RC Beschaltung 24VAC/DC, S00

RC Beschaltung 127...240VAC, S00

RC Beschaltung 24VAC/DC, S00

Magnetventilspule 24VDC

RC-GLIED 24VUC

3RV 1011-1GA10 /4,5-6,3

3RV 1011-1FA10 /3,5-5

PN7009

3SB34 00 -0C

3SB30 00-0AA71

SI 1000 STROEMUNGSWAECH.

EKL 1,0

MPRA-SMK-A-3-KT-F

KS41-113-000D-000

51008029

3 RT 1916-1CB00

3 RT 1916-1CD00

3 RT 1916-1CB00

SPULE 24VDC

RC-GLIED 24VUC

3RV 1011-1GA10 /4,5-6,3

3RV 1011-1FA10 /3,5-5

PN7009

3SB34 00 -0C

TASTER 3SB30 00-0AA71

SI 1000 STROEMUNGSWAECH.

EKL 1,0

MPRA-SMK-A-3-KT-F

KS41-113-000D-000

PROZESSANZEIGER RIA452

3 RT 1916-1CB00

3 RT 1916-1CD00

3 RT 1916-1CB00

SPULE 24VDC

RC-GLIED

7 8 9

NIL_133E / 02.04.03

SUPPLIER

PAGE

PATH

Siemens 3.3

Siemens 3.6

ifm electronic 6.3

Siemens 7.7

Siemens 7.7

ifm electronic 6.6

MARX 4.1

ers 5.2

PMA 6.0

Endress&Hauser 7.1

Siemens

Siemens

Siemens

CASTEL

5.7

6.9

6.4

5.1

Murrelektronik 5.1

11


Datum

Gepr.

Norm

21.06.06

Bearb.

TRA

22.06.06

WA 6952001/001

SK 3335.169

Urspr.

Ers.f.



D - 35745 Herborn

Ers.d.

Stckliste


=

+

Bl.

12

12

Bl.

MPR-SMK-A-x-xx-x ENG

Parameter-List for temperature controller MPR-SMK-A-x-xx-x

Working level

Indication Description

Present value The present temperature of the medium as measured is permanently displayed.

Target value Press the SET button to see the target temperature set for output port relay K1.

Press the “RESET” button to reset a failure message

C – Parameter level

Switching to C-Parameter level:

Press the “UP” and “Down” arrow key simultaneously for 5 seconds until “C1”

appears on the display.

Back to working level : Press “UP” and “DOWN” arrow key for 5 seconds.

Indication Description

C1 Target temperature C1 Compressor

Zone

+18°C

C2

C3

C4

C20

C21

C22

C23

C91

C99

Target temperature C2 Temperature high

Target temperature C3 Temperature low

Target temperature C4 (depends on setting in parameter P5)

Hysteresis for target-temperature C1

Hysteresis for target-temperature C2 (if present)

Hysteresis for target-temperature C3 (if present)

Hysteresis for target-temperature C4 (depends on setting in parameter P5)

Actual value correction for sensor (offset value)

Button lock

0 = not locked

1 = locked

+30°C

+5°C

-

1,5K

1K

1K

-

0K

0

Seite 1 von 1


P – Parameter level

Switching to P-Parameter level: Jump first into C-Parameter level than press the “UP” arrow key

simultaneously till “C99” appears. Hold down the “UP” arrow key and press

additionally the “Down” arrow key till “P1” is seen on the display.

Back to working level: Press “UP” and “DOWN” arrow key for 5 seconds.

Parameter Description Zone

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5

P6

P7

P10

P11

P12

P13

P15

P16

P17

P18

P20

P21

P22

P23

P24

P25

P26

P27

Switching direction Relay K1

Switching direction Relay K2 (if present)

Switching direction Relay K3 (if present)

0 = Heating contact

1 = Cooling contract

0 = Heating contact


0 = Heating contact


0 = Heating contact


Switching direction Relay K4

(depends on setting in parameter P5)

General function for relay K4

Wire protection function for all fault inputs

0 = control contact

1 = alarm contact

2 = alarm contact for upper- or – lower

target value C4

0 = Fault recognition by “low” input signal

1 = Fault recognition by “high” input signal

0 = Relay K4 is off at alarm or fault signal

1 = Relay K4 is on at alarm or fault singal

Alarmfunction relay K4

(only active if P5 = 1 or 2)

Function K1 in event of sensor failure


(if present)


(if present)


0 = inactive in event of failure

1 = active in event of failure







Hysteresis mode target temperature C1

Hysteresis mode target temperature C2 (if present)

Hysteresis mode target temperature C3 (if present)

Hysteresis mode target temperature C4

(depends on settingin parameter P5)

0 = symmetrical

1 = only on one side

0 = symmetrical


0 = symmetrical


0 = symmetrical


Limit for target temperature C1 downwards -50°C .. +150°C

Limit for target temperature C1 upwards

Limit for target temperature C2 downwards

(if present)

-50°C .. +150°C

-50°C .. +150°C


(if present)

-50°C .. +150°C

Limit for target temperature C3 downwards

(if present)


(if present)

-50°C .. +150°C

-50°C .. +150°C

Limit for target temperature C4 downwards -50°C .. +150°C

Limit for target temperature C4 upwards -50°C .. +150°C

1

0

1

-

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

+10°C

+25°C

+30°C

+40°C

+0°C

+5°C

Seite 2 von 2


Parameter Description

P30

P31

P32

P33

P34

P35

P36

P37

P50

P51

P52

P53

P54

P55

P56

P57

Limit for hysteresis 1 downwards (parameter C20) 0,1K .. 99,9 K

Limit for hysteresis 1 upwards (parameter C20) 0,1K .. 99,9 K






Limit for hysteresis 4 upwards (parameter C23)

Minimum action time for relay K1

0,1K .. 99,9 K

0...999 Sec.

Minimum pause time for relay K1

Minimum action time for relay K2 (if present)

Minimum pause time for relay K2 (if present)

Minimum action time for relay K3 (if present)

Minimum pause time for relay K3 (if present)

Minimum action time for relay K4 (depends on setting in parameter P5)

Minimum pause time for relay K4 (depends on setting in parameter P5)

0...999 Sec.

0...999 Sec.

0...999 Sec.

0...999 Sec.

0...999 Sec.

0...999 Sec.

0...999 Sec.

P99 Temperature unit °C / °F

0 = °C

1 = °F

Fault And Error Codes

The display shows the relevant fault code in case of a fault. (display flashes)

Code Description

F1 Failure on input 1 Motor circuit breaker

F2 Failure on input 2 Float control

F3 Failure on input 3 Temperature low

F4 Failure on input 4 Temperature high

F5 Failure on input 5 Low pressure

F6 Failure on input 6 High pressure

F7 Failure on input 7 -




E1 Short circuit sensor

E2

Damaged sensor

FFF Exceeded maximum measurement field of sensors

F13 Memory error

Seite 3 von 3

Zone

1K

3K

1K

3K

1K

3K

-

-

0 sec.

0 sec.

0 sec.

0 sec.

0 sec.

0 sec.

0 sec.

0 sec.

0


Device

10

Device

9

Device

8

Device

7

Device

6

Device

5

Device

4

Device

3

Device

2

Device

1

Error detection at “low” signal

Error detection at“high” signal

KS

A2 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Faultinputs

A1

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

1 2

Sensor

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

K1 K2 K3

A1 = Positive operating Voltage / phase L1

A2 = Neutal wire (N)

K1..K3

KS

= Relay contacts

= Relay contact depents on configuration

- Control contact

- Fault contact

- Fault contact and temperature alarm

contact.

A1 A2

Supply

Connecting diagram (the right number of replays are shown of the device label)

Seite 4 von 4


Specification of the temperature controller MPR-SMK-x-xx-x

Connecting Diagram

44 41 42 NC

K4:= 230V

10A AC1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

K1..K3:= 230V 10AC1

Sample – please refer the label of your device

Technical Data

Number of Sensors: 1

Type of Sensor:

Effective range :

KTY 81-210 (PT100)

-50°C bis +150°C

The effective range is only good if you use a right type of sensor and wiring.

Output

Number of outputs: Max. 3 + 1

Output 1 … 4 (K1 .. KS): Two way contact (voltage free)

Max. switching current 10A (1,5)A

Max. switching voltage 250V~

Number of inputs: 10

Note: Connect the inputs always with A1!!

Features

- Two-step regulator

- Free adjustable Hysteresis

- Heating/cooling interchangeable

- Temperature alarm

- Fault indicator with 10 digital inputs

Operation voltage

24V AC with ( 50 ... 60 ) Hz or 230V AC ( 50 … 60 ) Hz

(Use only the operation voltage as shown on the device label)

Connectors

- Screw terminals and plug connectors

- 2 x 15 polar, grid 5,00 mm for 2,5 mm² wire

Display

- 3 digits LED-Display red, 13,0 mm

- 4 LEDs for output status control

- Range of display from –99 to 999

Housing

The regulator is fit for board montage

Front-panel

Front-panel cut-out

Installation depth

( 48 x 96 ) mm

( 42 x 90 ) mm ca. 88 mm

Protection code IP64 (Front panel side)

Ambient temperature

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Max. humidity:

0°C … +50°C

-20°C … +70°C

75 % (no condensation)

Seite 5 von 5

PMA Prozeß- und Maschinen-Automation GmbH

Industrial controller KS 40-1,

KS41-1 and KS42-1

KS40-1

KS41-1

KS42-1

KS40-1

KS41-1

KS42-1

Operating manual

English

9499-040-62711

Valid from: 8415

û

BlueControl

®

More efficiency in engineering, more overview in operating:

The projecting environment for the BluePort controllers

Updates

Mini

ATTENTION!

Version www or

PMA-CD on

Description of symbols:

g

General information

a

General warning

l

Attention: ESD sensitive devices

© PMA Prozeß- und Maschinen-Automation GmbH Printed in Germany

All rights reserved. No part of this document may bereproduced or published in any form or by any means without prior written permission from the copyright owner.

A publication of PMA Prozeß- und Maschinen Automation

P.O.Box 310229

D-34058 Kassel

Germany

Contents

1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2 Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.1 Connecting diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.2 Terminal connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3.1 Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3.2 Behaviour after power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.3 Operating level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.4 Maintenance manager / Error list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3.5 Self-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.5.1 Preparation for self-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.5.2 Self-tuning sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.5.3 Self-tuning start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3.5.4 Self-tuning cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3.5.5 Acknowledgement procedures in case of unsuccessful self-tuning . 16

3.5.6 Examples for self-tuning attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3.6 Manual tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3.7 Alarm handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

3.8 Operating structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4 Configuration level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

4.1 Configuration survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

4.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

4.3 Set-point processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

4.4 Configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

4.4.1 On-Off controller / Signaller (inverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

4.4.2 2-point controller (inverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

4.4.3 3-point controller (relay & relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.4.4 3-point stepping controller (relay & relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

4.4.5 Continuous controller (inverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

4.4.6

- Y - Off controller / 2-point controller with pre-contact . . . . . . 35

4.4.7 KS4x-1 with measured value output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Operating KS4x-1 3

5 Parameter setting level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

5.1 Parameter survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

5.2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

5.3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

5.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

5.5 Input scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5.5.1 Input Inp.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5.5.2 Input InP.2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

6 Calibration level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

7 Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

8 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

8.1 Setting up the timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

8.1.1 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

8.1.2 Tolerance band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

8.1.3 Timer start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

8.1.4 Signal end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

8.2 Determining the timer run-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

8.3 Starting the timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

9 BlueControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

10 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

11

Technical data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

12 Safety hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

12.1 Resetting to factory setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4 Operating KS4x-1

Mounting

1

Mounting

10

(0.4")

(4.65")

118

SP.X

126

125 run

Ada

Err min.48

(1.89")

1..10

(0.04..0.4")

+0,6 45

(1.77" +0.02

)

KS 40-1 universal

48 (1.89")

Loc 10V i mA/Pt

Safety switch max.

60°C min.

0°C max.

95% rel.

%

Loc 10V mA/Pt

Front view KS41-1

SP.x

126

125 run

Ada

Err

KS 41-1 universal

96 (3.78")

Front view KS42-1

SP.x

run

Ada

Err

126

125

KS 42-1 universal

96 (3.78")

Ü or:

Ü

*

*

Safety switch:

For access to the safety switches, the controller must be withdrawn from the housing. Squeeze the top and bottom of the front bezel between thumb and forefinger and pull the controller firmly from the housing..

10V i mA/Pt right 1

Loc left open

Current signal / Pt100 / thermocouple at InP.1

Voltage signal at InP.1

Access to the levels is as adjusted by means of BlueControl

2 closed

1 all levels accessible wihout restriction

1

Factory setting

2

Default setting: display of all levels suppressed, password PASS = OFF a Safety switch 10V i mA/Pt always in position left or right. Leaving the safety switch open may lead to faulty functions!

l Caution! The unit contains ESD-sensitive components.

Operating KS4x-1 5


2


2.1 Connecting diagram

Modbus RTU

RGND

DATA B

RXD-B

GND

RXD-A

TXD-B

DATA A TXD-A

RS485 RS422 di2 di3

U

T

Option

9

10

11

7

8

12

13

14

15

(16)

17

3

4

5

6

1

(2) a

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

10

11

12

13

14

15

L

N

90...250V

24V AC/DC

e

Logic c d b

U

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

HC mA mA INP2 di1

0..10 V*

INP1 a b c d

* Safety switch mA i V in position left g Dependent of order, the controller is fitted with : w flat-pin terminals 1 x 6,3mm or 2 x 2,8mm to DIN 46 244 or screw terminals for 0,5 to 2,5mm²

2.2 Terminal connection

Power supply connection 1

See chapter 11 "Technical data"

Connection of input INP1 2

Input for variable x1 (process value)

a thermocouple

b resistance thermometer (Pt100/ Pt1000/ KTY/ ...)

c current (0/4...20mA)

d voltage (0/2...10V)

Connecting diagram 6 Operating KS4x-1


Connection of input INP2 3

Heating current input (0...50mA AC) or input for ext. set-point (0/4...20mA)

Connection of input di1 4

Digital input, configurable as switch or push-button

Connection of outputs OUT1/2 5

Relay outputs 250V/2A normally open with common contact connection

Connection of output OUT3 6

a relay (250V/2A), potential-free changeover contact universal output

b current (0/4...20mA)

c voltage (0/2...10V)

d transmitter supply

e logic (0..20mA / 0..12V)

Connection of inputs di2/3 7 (option)

Digital inputs (24VDC external), galvanically isolated, configurable as switch or push-button

Connection of output U

Supply voltage connection for external energization

T

8 (option)

Connection of bus interface 9 (option)

RS422/485 interface with Modbus RTU protocol

3 INP2 current tansformer

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

10

11

12

13

14

15

Logic

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

10

11

12

13

14

15

+

SSR

_

+

5 OUT1/2 heating/cooling

N

L

N

L

Operating KS4x-1 7 Terminal connection


7 8 di2/3, U

T

2-wire transmitter supply

+24VDC

3

0V

1

+

2

-

K

17,5V

22mA

5mA

5mA

+

-

Option

10

11

12

13

14

15

(16)

17

1

(2)

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

J x

4

5

6

1

2

3

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

+

-

OUT3

6 OUT3 transmitter supply

-

+

13V

22mA

+

-

3

2

1

K a If U

T and the universal output OUT3 is used there may be no external galvanic connection between measuring and output circuits!

6 OUT3 as logic output with solid-state relay (series and parallel connection)

Series connection

Logic

3

4

5

6

10

12V

4V

4V

4V

+

SSR

_

+

SSR

_

+

SSR

_

Parallel connection

12V

SSR

_

+

SSR

_

+

Terminal connection 8 Operating KS4x-1


9 RS485 interface (with RS232-RS485 interface converter) *

R

T

RGND

DATA B

DATA A

12

13

14

15

(16)

17

10

11

12

13

14

15

RGND

DATA B

DATA A

12

13

14

15

(16)

17

10

11

12

13

14

15

RGND

DATA B

DATA A

12

13

14

15

(16)

17

R=100 Ohm

10

11

12

13

14

15

RGND connection optional max. 1000m

”Twisted Pair” R

T

J

PC converter

RS485-RS232

* Interface description Modbus RTU in seperate manual: see page 50.

KS4x-1 connecting example:

L1

L2

KS 40-1

1

2

3

Logic

7

8

9

4

5

6

10

11

12

13

14

15 fuse

SSR

_

+

+ fuse contactor heating

TB 40-1 1

Temperature limiter

1

2

3

7

8

9

4

5

6

10

11

12

13

14

15

+ reset fuse

N1

N2

1 TB 40-1 Temperature limiter

Standard version (3 relays):

TB40-100-0000D-000 r other versions on request a CAUTION: Using a temperature limiter is recommendable in systems where overtemperature implies a fire hazard or other risks.

Operating KS4x-1 9 Terminal connection

Operation

3

Operation

3.1 Front view

KS40-1

0

!

$

SP.x

1 2 3 OK

126.

125

KS 40-1 universal

SP.x

KS41-1

126

125 run

Ada

Err

KS 41-1 universal

SP.x

run

Ada

Err

KS 42-1 universal run

Ada

Err

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

4

"

KS42-1

126

125

1 Status of switching outputs

OuT.1... 3

2 Lit with limit value 1 ( PArA /

Lim ) not exceeded

3 Process value display

4 Set-point, controller output

5 Signals ConF and PArA level

6 Programmer or timer running

7 Self-tuning active

8 Entry in error list

9 Set-point SP.2 or SP.E is effective

0 Set-point gradient effective

! Manual/automatic switch-over:

Off: Automatic

On: Manual

(changing possible)

Blinks: Manual

(changing not possible

(r ConF/ Cntr/ MAn)

" Enter key: calls up extended operating level / error list

§ Up/down keys: changing the set-point or the controller output value

$ Manual mode /spec. function

( ConF / LOGI )

% PC connection for

BlueControl (engineering tool)

LED colours:

LED 1, 2, 3:

LED OK: other LEDs: yellow green red g In the upper display line, the process value is always displayed. At parameter, configuration, calibration as well as extended operating level, the bottom display line changes cyclically between parameter name and parameter value.

Front view 10 Operating KS4x-1

Operation

3.2 Behaviour after power-on

After supply voltage switch-on, the unit starts with the operating level.

The unit is in the condition which was active before power-off.

If KS4x-1 was in manual mode before power-off, the controller starts with correcting value Y2 after switching on again.

3.3 Operating level

The content of the extended operating level is determined by means of BlueControl (engineering tool). Parameters which are used frequently or the display of which is important can be copied to the extended operating level.

Automatic Manual time out

126

125

È

Ì

Ù i Ò i

Ò

126 y 21

È

Ì

Ù time out

126 y 21

Ù only display

126

125

È

Ì

Ù

Extended operating level

time out

Errorliste

(if error exists)

126

FbF.1

Err display switching

126

2

Err

Operating KS4x-1 11 Behaviour after power-on

Operation

3.4 Maintenance manager / Error list

With one or several errors, the extended operating level always starts with the error list. Signalling an actual entry in the error list (alarm, error) is done by the Err LED in the display. To reach the error list press Ù twice.

SP.x

126

125 run

Ada

Err

Err LED status

(Status 2) error

Signification

Alarm due to existing

Error removed,

Alarm not acknowledged

No error, all alarm entries deleted

Proceed as follows

- Determine the error type in the error list via the error number

- -Change to status 1 after error removal.

- Acknowledge the alarm in the error list pressing key È or Ì

- The alarm entry was deleted (Status 0) .

-Not visible except when acknowledging

Error list:

Name

E.1

E.2

E.4

FbF.1

Sht.1

POL.1

FbF.2

Sht.2

POL.2

HCA

SSr

Description

Internal error, cannot be removed reset

Hardware error

Cause

- E.g. defective EEPROM

- e.g. EMC trouble

- Codenumber and hardware are not identical

Sensor break INP1 - Sensor defective

- Faulty cabling

Short circuit INP1 - Sensor defective

- Faulty cabling

INP1polarity error - Faulty cabling

Sensor break INP2 - Sensor defective

- Faulty cabling

Short circuit INP2 - Sensor defective

INP2 polarity

(HCA)

- Faulty cabling

- Faulty cabling

- Heating current circuit interrupted, I< HC.A or I>

HC.A (dependent of configuration)

- Heater band defective

- Current flow in heating circuit with controller off

- SSR defective

Possible remedial action

- Contact PMA service

- Return unit to our factory

- Keep measurement and power supply cables in separate runs

- Ensure that interference suppression of contactors is provided

- Contact PMA service

- Elektronic-/Optioncard must be exchanged

- Replace INP1 sensor

- Check INP1 connection



- Reverse INP1 polarity



- Replace sensor INP2


- Reverse INP2 polarity

- Check heating current circuit

- If necessary, replace heater band

- Check heating current circuit

- If necessary, replace solid-state relay

Maintenance manager / Error list 12 Operating KS4x-1

Operation

Name

LooP

AdA.H

AdA.C

LiM.1

Lim.2

Lim.3

Inf.1

Inf.2

Description

(LOOP)

Cause

- Input signal defective or not connected correctly

- Output not connected correctly

- See Self-tuning heating error status alarm

(ADAH) alarm cooling

(ADAC)

- See Self-tuning cooling error status stored limit alarm 1 - adjusted limit value 1 exceeded stored limit alarm 2 - adjusted limit value 2 exceeded stored limit alarm 3 - adjusted limit value 3 exceeded duty cycle message

(digital ouputs)

- adjusted number of operating hours reached

- adjusted number of duty cycles reached

Possible remedial action

- Check heating or cooling circuit

- Check sensor and replace it, if necessary

- Check controller and switching device

- see Self-tuning heating error status

- see Self-tuning cooling error status

- check process

- check process

- check process

- application-specific

- application-specific g Saved alarms (Err-LED is lit) can be acknowledged and deleted with the digital input di1/2/3 or the Ò-key.

Configuration, see page 27: ConF / LOGI / Err.r

g If an alarm is still valid that means the cause of the alarm is not removed so far

(Err-LED blinks), then other saved alarms can not be acknowledged and deleted.

Self-tuning heating ( ADA.H) and cooling ( ADA.C) error status:

Error status

0

3

4

5

6

7

8

Description

No error

Faulty control action

Low reversal point

Behaviour

Re-configure controller (inverse i direct)

The control loop is perhaps not closed: check sensor, connections and process

Increase ( ADA.H) max. output limiting Y.Hi or decrease ( ADA.C) min. output limiting Y.Lo

If necessary, increase (inverse) or reduce (direct) set-point

(dy > 5%) ( ADA.C) min. output limiting Y.Lo

Set-point reserve too small Increase set-point (invers), reduce set-point (direct) or increase set-point range

(r PArA / SEtp / SP.LO and SP.Hi )

Operating KS4x-1 13 Maintenance manager / Error list

Operation

3.5 Self-tuning

For determination of optimum process parameters, self-tuning is possible.

After starting by the operator, the controller makes an adaptation attempt, whereby the process characteristics are used to calculate the parameters for fast line-out to the set-point without overshoot.

The following parameters are optimized when self-tuning:

Parameter set 1:

Pb1 - Proportional band 1 (heating) in engineering units [e.g. °C] ti1 - Integral time 1 (heating) in [s] r only, unless set to OFF td1 - Derivative time 1 (heating) in [s] r only, unless set to OFF t1 - Minimum cycle time 1 (heating) in [s] r only, unless Adt0 was set to

“no self-tuning” during configuration by means of BlueControl ®.

Pb2 - Proportional band 2 (cooling) in engineering units [e.g. °C] ti2 - Integral time 2 (cooling) in [s] r only, unless set to OFF td2 - Derivative time 2 (cooling) in [s] r only, unless set to OFF t2 - Minimum cycle time 2 (cooling) in [s] r only, unless Adt0 was set to

“no self-tuning” during configuration by means of BlueControl ®

3.5.1 Preparation for self-tuning w Adjust the controller measuring range as control range limits. Set values rnG.L and rnG.H to the limits of subsequent control. (Configuration rControllerrlower and upper control range limits)

ConFrCntrr rnG.L and rnG.H

w Determine which parameter set shall be optimized (see tables above).

3.5.2 Self-tuning sequence

The controller outputs 0% correcting variable or Y.Lo and waits, until the process is at rest (see start-conditions on page 8).

Subsequently, a correcting variable step change to 100% is output.

The controller attempts to calculate the optimum control parameters from the process response. If this is done successfully, the optimized parameters are taken over and used for line-out to the set-point.

With a 3-point controller, this is followed by “cooling”.

After completing the 1st step as described, a correcting variable of -100% (100% cooling energy) is output from the set-point.

After successfull determination of the “cooling parameters”, line-out to the set-point is using the optimized parameters.

Self-tuning 14 Operating KS4x-1

Operation

Start condition: w Rest condition

For process evaluation, a stable condition is required. Therefore, the controller waits until the process has reached a stable condition after self-tuning start.

The rest condition is considered being reached, when the process value oscillation is smaller than 0,5% of (rnG.H - rnG.L).

Set-point reserve

After having come to rest with 0% correcting variable or with Y.Lo, the controller requires a sufficient set-point reserve for its self-tuning attempt, in order to avoid overshoot.

Sufficient set-point reserve: inverse controller:(with process value<set-point-(10% of SP.Hi - SP.LO) direct controller:(with process value>set-point+ (10% of SP.Hi - SP.LO)

3.5.3 Self-tuning start g Self-tuning start can be locked via BlueControl

(engineering tool) ( P.Loc).

The operator can start self-tuning at any time.

For this, keys Ù and È must be pressed simultaneously. The AdA LED starts blinking. The controller outputs 0% or Y.Lo, waits until the process is at rest and starts self-tuning (AdA

LED lit permanently).

SP.x

126

125

After successful self-tuning, the AdA-LED is off and the controller continues operating with the new control parameters.

run

Ada

Err

3.5.4 Self-tuning cancellation

By the operator:

Self-tuning can always be cancelled by the operator. For this, press Ù and È key simultaneously. With manual-automatic switch-over configured via Ò key, self-tuning can also be canceled by actuating Ò key. The controller continues operating with the old parameters in automatic mode in the first case and in manual mode in the second case.

By the controller:

If the Err LED starts blinking whilst self-tuning is running, successful self-tuning is prevented due to the control conditions. In this case, self-tuning was cancelled by the controller.

Dependent of control type, the output status is: w 3-pnt. stepping controller: actuator is closed (0% output) w 2-pnt./ 3-pnt./ continuous controller:

If self-tuning was started from the automatic mode, the controller output is

0%. With self-tuning started from manual mode, the controller output is Y2.

Operating KS4x-1 15 Self-tuning

Operation

3.5.5 Acknowledgement procedures in case of unsuccessful self-tuning

1. Press keys Ù and È simultaneously:

The controller continues controlling using the old parameters in automatic mode. The Err LED continues blinking, until the self-tuning error was acknowledged in the error list.

2. Press key Ò (if configured):

The controller goes to manual mode. The Err LED continues blinking, until the self-tuning error was acknowleged in the error list.

3. Press key Ù :

Display of error list at extended operating level. After acknowledgement of the error message, the controller continues control in automatic mode using the old parameters.

Cancellation causes: r page 13: "Error status self-tuning heating ( ADA.H) and cooling ( ADA.C)"

3.5.6 Examples for self-tuning attempts

(controller inverse, heating or heating/cooling)

Start: heating power switched on

Heating power Y is switched off (1).

When the change of process value X was constant during one minute (2), the power is switched on (3).

At the reversal point, the self-tuning attempt is finished and the new parameter are used for controlling to set-point W.

Start: heating power switched off

The controller waits 1,5 minutes (1).

Heating power Y is switched on (2).

At the reversal point, the self-tuning attempt is finished and control to the set-point is using the new parameters.

X

W

100%

Y

0%

Start r 1

X

W blinks

100%

Y

0% start r 1 blinks

2

2

3 t reversal point t reversal point t t

Self-tuning 16 Operating KS4x-1

Operation

Start: at set-point

Heating power Y is switched off (1).

If the change of process value X was constant during one minute and the control deviation is > 10% of SP.Hi -

SP.LO (2), the power is switched on

(3). At the reversal point, the self-tuning attempt is finished, and control to set-point W is using the new parameters.

X

W

100%

Y

0% start r 1 blinks

2

3 t reversal point t

Three-point controller

The parameters for heating and cooling are determined in two attempts.

The heating power is switched on

(1). At reversal point 1, heating parameters Pb1, ti1, td1 and t1 are determined. The process value is lined out to the set-point (2). The

X

W

+100%

Y 0%

-100% start r 1 t reversal point 1

2 3 t t reversal point 2 cooling power is switched on (3). At reversal point 2, parameters Pb2, ti2, td2 and t2 are determined and the self-tuning attempt is finished. Control to set-point W is using the new parameters.

3.6 Manual tuning

The optimization aid should be used with units on which the control parameters shall be set without self-tuning.

For this, the response of process variable x after a step change of correcting variable y can be used. Frequently, plotting the complete response curve (0 to 100%) is not possible, because the process must be kept within defined limits. Values T and x max

(step change from 0 to 100 %) or t and x (partial step response) can be used to determine the maximum rate of increase v max

.

g y

100%

0%

Xmax

Yh x

Tg t y = correcting variable

Y h

= control range

Tu = delay time (s)

Tg = recovery time (s)

X max

= maximum process value

Tu

{t

{X t

V max

Tg { x t

= max. rate of increase of process value

Operating KS4x-1 17 Manual tuning

Operation

The control parameters can be determined from the values calculated for delay time T u

, maximum rate of increase v oscillates.

max

, control range X h and characteristic K according to the formulas given below. Increase Xp, if line-out to the set-point

Parameter adjustment effects

Parameter Control Line-out of disturbances

Pb1 higher increased damping slower line-out

Start-up behaviour slower reduction of duty cycle lower reduced damping faster line-out faster reduction of duty cycle td1 higher reduced damping faster response to disturbances faster reduction of duty cycle lower increased damping slower response to disturbances slower reduction of duty cycle ti1 higher increased damping slower line-out slower reduction of duty cycle lower reduced damping faster line-out faster reduction of duty cycle

K = Vmax * Tu

With 2-point and

3-point controllers, the cycle time must be adjusted to t1 / t2 £ 0,25 * Tu

Formulas

controller behavior Pb1 [phy. units]

PID 1,7 * K

PD

PI

P

3-point-stepping

0,5 * K

2,6 * K

K

1,7 * K td1 [s]

2 * Tu

Tu

OFF

OFF

Tu ti1 [s]

2 * Tu

OFF

6 * Tu

OFF

2 * Tu

3.7 Alarm handling

Max. three alarms can be configured and assigned to the individual outputs. Generally, outputs OuT.1... OuT.3 can be used each for alarm signalling. If more than one signal is linked to one output the signals are OR linked. Each of the 3 limit values Lim.1 … Lim.3 has 2 trigger points H.x (Max) and L.x (Min), which can be switched off individually (parameter = “OFF”). Switching difference

HYS.x of each limit value is adjustable.

Alarm handling 18 Operating KS4x-1

Operation

Ü Operaing principle absolut alarm

L.1 = OFF

InL.1

InH.1

H.1

* Operating principle relative alarm

L.1 = OFF

SP

InL.1

H.1

HYS.1

HYS.1

InH.1

LED

1 2

LED

1 2

H.1 = OFF

InL.1

L.1

2

LED

HYS.1

1

InH.1

InL.1

H.1 = OFF

HYS.1

L.1

SP

LED

2 1

InH.1

InL.1

H.1

L.1

LED

2

HYS.1

1

HYS.1

InH.1

InL.1

2

LED

2

LED

HYS.1

L.1

SP

1

InH.1

H.1

HYS.1

2

LED

1: normally closed ( ConF/ Out.x / O.Act=1 )

2: normally open ( ConF/ Out.x / O.Act= 0 ) g The variable to be monitored can be selected seperately for each alarm via configuration

The following variables can be monitored: w process value w control deviation xw (process value - set-point) w control deviation xw + suppression after start-up or set-point change w effective set-point Weff w correcting variable y (controller output)

Operating KS4x-1 19 Alarm handling

Operation g If measured value monitoring + alarm status storage is chosen ( ConF / Lim /

Fnc.x = 2), the alarm relay remains switched on until the alarm is resetted in the error list ( Lim 1..3 = 1).

3.8 Operating structure

After supply voltage switch-on, the controller starts with the operating levels.

The controller status is as before power off.

126

125

Ù

3 sec.

126

PArA

Ì

Ù

126

ConF

Ì

PASS

Ù

126

CAL

Ì

PASS

Ù

126

End

PASS

Ù g PArA - level: At PArA - level, the right decimal point of the upper display line is lit continuously.

g ConF - level: At ConF - level, the right decimal point of the upper

PASS display line blinks

.

When safety switch Loc is open, only the levels enabled by means of BlueControl (engineering tool) are visible and accessible by entry of the password adjusted by means of BlueControl (engineering tool). Individual parameters accessible without password must be copied to the extended operating level.

Factory setting: Safety switch Loc closed: all levels accessible without restriction, password PASS = OFF.

Loc closed open open open

OFF / password

OFF / password

OFF

Password disabled / enabled disabled enabled enabled enabled disabled enabled entry

Operating structure 20 Operating KS4x-1

Configuration level

4


4.1 Configuration survey

ConF Configuration level

È

Ì

Cntr Control

SP.Fn StYP I.Fnc Fnc.1

O.Act

b.ti S.Lin StYP Src.1

Y.1

C.Fnc Corr mAn

C.Act

FAIL rnG.L

rnG.H

Fnc.2

Src.2

Fnc.3

Src.3

HC.AL

LP.AL

Y.2

Lim.1

Lim.2

Lim.3

LP.AL

HC.AL

HC.SC

time

P.End

FAi.1

FAi.2

O.tYP

O.Act

Y.1

Y.2

Lim.1

Lim.2

Lim.3

LP.AL

HC.AL

HC.SC

time

P.End

FAi.1

FAi.2

OuT.0

Out.1

O.Src

L_r bAud

SP.2 Addr

SP.E PrtY

Y.2

dELY mAn Unit

C.oFF dP m.Loc C.dEl

Err.r

P.run

di.Fn

Adjustment: w The configuratiuons can be adjusted by means of keys ÈÌ .

w Transition to the next configuration is by pressing key Ù .

w After the last configuration of a group, donE is displayed and followed by automatic change to the next group g Return to the beginning of a group is by pressing the Ù key for 3 sec.

Operating KS4x-1 21 Configuration survey


4.2 Configuration

Cntr

Name

SP.Fn

b.ti

C.Fnc

mAn

C.Act

FAIL

Value range Description

Basic configuration of setpoint processing

0

1

2

3 set-point controller can be switched over to external set-point

( LOGI/SP.E) program controller timer, mode 1(bandwidth-controlled, switched off at the end)

4

5

0

1

6

7

0...9999

2 active at the end) timer, mode 3 (switched off at the end) timer, mode 4 (set-point remains active at the end) timer, mode 5 (switch-on delay) timer, mode 6 (set-point switch-over)

Timer tolerance band for timer mode 1, 2 and 6. The timer starts when process value = setpoint b.ti

Control behaviour (algorithm) on/off controller or signaller with one output

PID controller (2-point and continuous)

0

1

3

4

0

1

0

1

2 switch-over

2 x PID (3-point and continuous)

3-point stepping controller

Manual operation permitted no yes (see also LOGI/ mAn)

Method of controller operation inverse, e.g. heating direct, e.g. cooling

Behaviour at sensor break controller outputs switched off y = Y2

Default

0

5

1

0

0

1 rnG.L

-1999...9999

X0 (low limit range of control) 1 rnG.H

-1999...9999

X100 (high limit range of control) 1

Adt0

0

1

Optimization of T1, T2 (only visible with BlueControl!)

Automatic optimization

No optimization

1 rnG.L and rnG.H are indicating the range of control on which e.g. the self-tuning is refering

0

900

0

Configuration 22 Operating KS4x-1


InP.1

Name

S.tYP

S.Lin

Corr fAI1


Sensor type selection

0

1

2

3

4

5

20

21

22

23

30

40 thermocouple type L (-100...900°C) , Fe-CuNi DIN thermocouple type J (-100...1200°C) , Fe-CuNi thermocouple type K (-100...1350°C), NiCr-Ni thermocouple type N (-100...1300°C), Nicrosil-Nisil thermocouple type S (0...1760°C), PtRh-Pt10% thermocouple type R (0...1760°C), PtRh-Pt13%

Pt100 (-200.0 ... 100,0 °C)

Pt100 (-200.0 ... 850,0 °C)

Pt1000 (-200.0 ... 200.0 °C) special 0...4500 Ohm (pre-defined as KTY11-6)

0...20mA / 4...20mA 1

0...10V / 2...10V 1

0

1

30 (0..20mA) and 40 (0..10V) adjustable) none

0

1

2

3

0

1 characteristic for KTY 11-6 temperature sensors is preset.

Measured value correction / scaling

Without scaling

Offset correction (at CAL level)

2-point correction (at CAL level)

Scaling (at PArA level)

Forcing INP1 (only visible with BlueControl!)

No forcing

Forcing via serial interface

InP.2

Name

I.Fnc

S.tYP

fAI2


Function selection of INP2

0

1

2

30 no function (subsequent input data are skipped) heating current input external set-point (SP.E)

Sensor type selection

31

0

1

0...20mA / 4...20mA 1

0...50mA AC 1

Forcing INP2 (only visible with BlueControl!)

No forcing


Default

1

0

0

0

Default

1

31

0



Lim

Name

Fnc.1

Fnc.2

Fnc.3

Src.1

Src.2

Src.3

HC.AL

LP.AL


Function of limit 1/2/3

0

1 switched off measured value monitoring

2

0

0

1

0

1

1

2

6

7

2 limit value can be reset via error list, Ò-key or a digital input ( LOGI/ Err.r).

Source of limit 1/2/3 process value control deviation xw (process value - set-point) control deviation xw (with suppression after start-up and set-point change) effective set-point Weff correcting variable y (controller output)

Alarm heat current function (INP2) switched off

Overload short circuit monitoring

Break and short circuit monitoring

Monitoring of control loop interruption for heating switched off / inactive active

If ti1=0 LOOP alarm is inactive!

Hour OFF..999999

Operating hours (only visible with BlueControl!)

Swit OFF..999999

Output switching cycles (only visible with BlueControl!)

Default

1

1

0

0

OFF

OFF

Out.1

Name

O.Act

Y.1

Y.2

Lim.1

Lim.2

HC.AL


Method of operation of output OUT1

0

1

0

1 direct / normally open inverse / normally closed

Controller output Y1/Y2 not active

0

1

0

1

0

1 active

Limit 1/2/3 signal not active active

Interruption alarm signal (LOOP) not active active

Heat current alarm signal not active active

Default

0

1

0

0

0 g

1 with current and voltage input signals, scaling is required (see chapter 5.3)

Resetting the controller configuration to factory setting (Default) r chapter 12.1 (page 56)



Name

HC.SC

timE

P.End

FAi.1

FAi.2

fOut


Solid state relay (SSR) short circuit signal

0

1

0 not active active

Timer end signal not active

1

0

1

0

1

0

1 active

Programmer end signal not active active

INP1/ INP2 error signal not active active

Forcing OUT1 (only visible with BlueControl!)

No forcing


Default

0

0

0

0

0

Out.2

Configuration parameters Out.2 as Out.1 except for: Default Y.1 = 0 Y.2 = 1

Out.3

Name

O.tYP

Default

0


Signal type selection OUT3

0

1

2

3

4

5 relay / logic (only visible with current/logic voltage)

0 ... 20 mA continuous (only visible with current/logic/volt.)

4 ... 20 mA continuous (only visible with current/logic/volt.)

0...10 V continuous (only visible with current/logic/voltage)

2...10 V continuous (only visible with current/logic/voltage) transmitter supply (only visible without OPTION)

O.Act

1

Y.1

Y.2

Lim.1

Lim.2

Lim.3

HC.AL

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

O.TYP=0) direct / normally open inverse / normally closed

Controller output Y1/Y2 (only visible when O.TYP=0) not active active

Limit 1/2/3 signal (only visible when O.TYP=0) not active active

Interruption alarm signal (LOOP) (only visible when

O.TYP=0) not active active

Heat current alarm signal (only visible when O.TYP=0) not active active

0

1

0

0

Operating KS4x-1 25 Configuration


Name

HC.SC

timE

P.End

FAi.1

FAi.2


Solid state relay (SSR) short circuit signal (only visible

0 when O.TYP=0) not active

1

0

1

0

1

0

1 active

Timer end signal (only visible when O.TYP=0) not active active

Programmer end signal (only visible when O.TYP=0) not active active

INP1/ INP2 error (only visible when O.TYP=0) not active active

Out.0

-1999...9999

Scaling of the analog output for 0% (0/4mA or 0/2V, only

Out.1

O.Src

fOut

-1999...9999

0

1

2

3

4

5

0

1

Scaling of the analog output for 100% (20mA or 10V, only

Signal source of the analog output OUT3 (only visible when not used controller output y1 (continuous) controller output y2 (continuous) process value effective set-point Weff control deviation xw (process value - set-point)

Forcing OUT3 (only visible with BlueControl!)

No forcing


Default

0

0

0

1

0

100

1

0 g Method of operation and usage of output Out.1 to Out.3:

Is more than one signal chosen active as source, those signals are OR-linked.

LOGI

Name

L_r

SP.2


Local / Remote switching (Remote: adjusting of all values

0 by front keys is blocked) no function (switch-over via interface is possible)

1

2

2

3

3

4

0

4 active

DI1

DI2 (only visible with OPTION)


Switching to second setpoint SP.2

no function (switch-over via interface is possible)

DI1



Default

0

0


Name

SP.E

Y2 mAn

C.oFF

m.Loc

Err.r

P.run

di.Fn

fDI1


Switching to external setpoint SP.E

0

1

2

3

4 no function (switch-over via interface is possible) active

DI1


0

1

2

3

4

4

6

2

3

3

4

2

3

4

6

0

1

2

6

0

4

6

0

2

3

4

0

2

3

0

2

0

0

1


Y/Y2 switching no function (switch-over via interface is possible)

DI1



Ò key

Automatic/manual switching no function (switch-over via interface is possible) always activated (manual station)

DI1



Ò key

Switching off the controller no function (switch-over via interface is possible)

DI1



Ò key

Blockage of hand function no function (switch-over via interface is possible)

DI1



Reset of all error list entries no function (switch-over via interface is possible)

DI1



Ò key

Programmer Run/Stop (see page 44) no function (switch-over via interface is possible)

DI1



Function of digital inputs (valid for all inputs) direct inverse toggle key function

Forcing di1 (only visible with BlueControl!)

No forcing


Operating KS4x-1 27


Default

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Configuration


Name fDI2 fDI3



0

1

0

1

No forcing



No forcing


Default

0

0

othr

Name bAud

Addr

PrtY dELY

Unit dP

C.dEl

FrEq

ICof

IAda

IExo

Pass


Baudrate of the interface (only visible with OPTION)

0

1

2

3

1...247

2400 Baud

4800 Baud

9600 Baud

19200 Baud

0

1

2

1

2

0...200

0

Address on the interace (only visible with OPTION)

Parity (only visible with OPTION) no parity (2 stop bits) even parity odd parity

Delay of response signal [ms] (only visible with OPTION)

Unit without unit

°C

°F

0

1

2

3

0..200

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

OFF...9999

point) no digit behind the decimal point

1 digit behind the decimal point

2 digits behind the decimal point

3 digits behind the decimal point

Modem delay [ms]

Switching 50 Hz / 60 Hz (only visible with BlueControl!)

50 Hz

60 Hz

Block controller off (only visible with BlueControl!)

Released

Blocked

Block auto tuning (only visible with BlueControl!)

Released

Blocked

Block extended operating level (only visible with

BlueControl!)

Released

Blocked

Password (only visible with BlueControl!)

Default

2

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

OFF



Name

IPar

ICnf

ICal


Block parameter level (only visible with BlueControl!)

0

1

0

Released

Blocked

Block configuration level (only visible with BlueControl!)

Released

1

0

1

Block

Block calibration level (only visible with BlueControl!)

Released

Blocked

Default

1

1

1

+ BlueControl - the engineering tool for the BluePort controller series

3 engineering tools with different functionality facilitating KS4x-1 configuration and parameter setting are available (see chapter 10: Accessory equipment with

ordering information).

In addition to configuration and parameter setting, the engineering tools are used for data acquisition and offer long-term storage and print functions. The engineering tools are connected to KS4x-1 via the front-panel interface "BluePort " by means of PC (Windows 95 / 98 / NT) and a PC adaptor.

Description BlueControl: see chapter 9: BlueControl (page 49)

4.3 Set-point processing

The set-point processing structure is shown in the following picture:

SP.x

126

125 run

Ada

Err

Xeff internal setpoint

Ü

ù programmer timer

{ 1

5

7

*

0 external setpoint

INP2

2.setpoint

SP.E

0/4...20 mA

SP.2

Index:

Ü

*

Ö :

: int/ext-setpoint switching

: configuration SP.Fn

switching

SP.Hi

SP.Lo

limitation

Ö r.SP

actual setpoint ramp

- LED

The ramp starts at process value with the following switchings:

-

- int / ext-setpoint switching

SP SP.2

switching

- Manual-/ Automatic switching

- at power on

Operating KS4x-1 29 Set-point processing


4.4 Configuration examples

4.4.1 On-Off controller / Signaller (inverse)

InL.1

SP.LO

InP.1Ê

100%

Out.1Â

0%

SH

SP SP.Hi

InH.1

ConF / Cntr: SP.Fn = 0

C.Fnc = 0

C.Act = 0

ConF / Out.1: O.Act = 0

Y.1

PArA / Cntr: SH

= 1

= 0...9999

set-point controller signaller with one output inverse action

(e.g. heating applications) action Out.1 direct control output Y1 active switching difference (symmetrical to the trigger point)

PArA / SEtP: SP.LO = -1999...9999 set-point limit low for Weff

SP.Hi = -1999...9999 set-point limit high for Weff g For direct signaller action, the controller action must be changed

(ConF / Cntr / C.Act = 1 ) process value

SH setpoint output

Configuration examples 30 Operating KS4x-1


4.4.2 2-point controller (inverse)

InL.1

SP.LO

InP.1Ê

100%

Out.1Â

0%

PB1

SP SP.Hi

InH.1


C.Fnc = 1

C.Act = 0


Y.1

= 1

PArA / Cntr: Pb1 = 0,1...9999

proportional band 1 (heating) ti1 = 1...9999

td1 = 1...9999

t1 set-point controller

2-point controller (PID) inverse action

(e.g. heating applications) action Out.1 direct control output Y1 active in units of phys. quantity (e.g. °C) integral time 1 (heating) in sec.

derivative time 1 (heating) in sec.

= 0,4...9999

min. cycle time 1 (heating)


SP.Hi = -1999...9999 set-point limit high for Weff g For direct action, the controller action must be changed

(ConF / Cntr / C.Act = 1 ).

output setpoint process value

Operating KS4x-1 31 Configuration examples

InL.1

SP.LO

InP.1Ê

100%

Out.1Â

0%

PB1

SP

PB2

SP.Hi

InH.1

100%

Out.2Â

0%



4.4.4 3-point stepping controller (relay & relay)

InL.1

SP.LO

InP.1Ê

100%

Out.1Â

0%

PB1

SP

SH

SP.Hi

InH.1

100%

Out.2Â

0%


C.Fnc = 4

C.Act = 0


Y.1

Y.2


Y.1

Y.2

= 1

= 0

= 0

= 1

PArA / Cntr: Pb1 = 0,1...9999 proportional band 1 (heating) in units of phys. quantity (e.g. °C) ti1 = 1...9999

td1 = 1...9999

t1

SH = 0...9999

set-point controller

3-point stepping controller inverse action

(e.g. heating applications) action Out.1 direct control output Y1 active control output Y2 not active action Out.2 direct control output Y1 not active control output Y2 active integral time 1 (heating) in sec.


= 0,4...9999 min. cycle time 1 (heating) tP tt neutral zone in units of phy. quantity

= 0,1...9999 min. pulse length in sec.

= 3...9999

actuator travel time in sec.


SP.Hi = -1999...9999 set-point limit high for Weff g For direct action of the 3-point stepping controller, the controller output action must be changed ( ConF / Cntr / C.Act = 1 ).

output 1 output 2

Operating KS4x-1 setpoint

33 process value

Configuration examples


4.4.5 Continuous controller (inverse)

InL.1

SP.LO

InP.1Ê

20 mA

Out.3Â

0/4 mA

PB1

SP SP.Hi

InH.1


C.Fnc = 1

C.Act = 0 set-point controller continuous controller (PID) inverse action

(e.g. heating applications)

ConF / Out.3: O.tYP = 1 / 2 Out.3 type ( 0/4 … 20mA )

Out.0 = -1999...9999 scaling analog output 0/4mA

Out.1 = -1999...9999 scaling analog output 20mA

PArA / Cntr: Pb1 = 0,1...9999

proportional band 1 (heating) ti1 = 1...9999

td1 = 1...9999

t1 = 0,4...9999

in units of phys. quantity (e.g. °C) integral time 1 (heating) in sec.


min. cycle time 1 (heating)


SP.Hi = -1999...9999 set-point limit high for Weff g For direct action of the continuous controller, the controller action must be changed ( ConF / Cntr / C.Act = 1 ).

g To prevent control outputs Out.1 and Out.2 of the continuous controller from switching simultaneously, the control function of outputs Out.1 and Out.2 must be switched off ( ConF / Out.1 and Out.2 / Y.1 and Y.2 = 0 ).



4.4.6 - Y - Off controller / 2-point controller with pre-contact

InL.1

InP.1Ê

100%

Out.1Â

0%

Out.2Â

SP.LO

SH

PB1 d.SP

SP SP.Hi

InH.1


C.Fnc = 2

C.Act = 0


Y.1

Y.2


Y.1

Y.2

= 1

= 0

= 0

= 1

PArA / Cntr: Pb1 = 0,1...9999

proportional band 1 (heating) in units of phys. quantity (e.g. °C) ti1 = 1...9999

td1 = 1...9999

t1

SH

= 0,4...9999

= 0...9999

set-point controller

-Y-Off controller inverse action

(e.g. heating applications) action Out.1 direct control output Y1 active control output Y2 not active action Out.2 direct control output Y1 not active control output Y2 active integral time 1 (heating) in sec.


min. cycle time 1 (heating) switching difference d.SP

= -1999...9999 trigg. point separation suppl. cont.

/ Y / Off in units of phys. quantity


SP.Hi = -1999...9999 set-point limit high for Weff

Operating KS4x-1 35 Configuration examples


4.4.7 KS4x-1 with measured value output phys.

quantity

Out.1

phys. quantity

Out.0

0/4mA

0/2V

20mA

10V mA / V

U

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

10

11

12

13

14

15

L

N

}

90...250VAC

24VUC

OUT3

INP1

+

ConF / Out.3: O.tYP = 1

= 2

= 3

= 4

Out.0 = -1999...9999

Out.1 = -1999...9999

O.Src = 3

Out.3 0...20mA continuous

Out.3 4...20mA continuous

Out.3 0...10V continuous

Out.3 2...10V continuous scaling Out.3

for 0/4mA or 0/2V scaling Out.3

for 20mA or 10V signal source for Out.3 is the process value


Parameter setting level

5


5.1 Parameter survey

PArA Parameter setting level

È

Ì t2

SH d.SP

tP tt

Y2

Y.Lo

Y.Hi

Y0

Ym.H

L.Ym

Pb1

Pb2 ti1 ti2 td1 td2 t1

SP.Lo SP.01 InL.1 Inl.2 L.1

SP.Hi Pt.01 OuL.1 OuL.2 H.1

SP.2 SP.02 InH.1 InH.2 HYS.1

r.SP Pt.02 OuH.1 OuH.2 L.2

t.SP SP.03 tF.1

H.2

Pt.03

SP.04

Pt.04

HYS.2

dEl.2

L.3

H.3

HYS.3

HC.A

Adjustment: w The parameters can be adjusted by means of keys ÈÌ w Transition to the next parameter is by pressing key Ù w After the last parameter of a group, donE is displayed, followed by automatic change to the next group.

g Return to the beginning of a group is by pressing the Ù key for 3 sec.

g If for 30 sec. no keypress is excecuted the controler returns to the process value and setpoint display ( Time Out = 30 sec. )

Parameter survey 37 Operating KS4x-1


5.2 Parameters

Cntr

Name Value range Description

Pb1 1...9999 1 Proportional band 1/2 (heating) in phys. dimensions (e.g. °C)

Pb2 1...9999 1 Proportional band 2 (cooling) in phys. dimensions (e.g. °C) ti1 1...9999

Integral action time 1 (heating) [s] ti2 1...9999

Integral action time 2 (cooling) [s] td1 1...9999

Derivative action time 1 (heating) [s] td2 1...9999

Derivative action time 2 (cooling) [s] t1 0,4...9999

Default

100

100

180

180

180

180

10

0...9999

d.SP

-1999...9999

Trigger point speration for series contact / Y / Off [phys.

tP 0,1...9999

Minimum impulse [s] tt 3...9999

Actuator response time for servo-motor [s]

Y2 -120...120

2. correcting variable

Y.Lo

-120...120

Lower output limit [%]

Y.Hi

-120...120

Upper output limit [%]

Y.0

-120...120

Working point for the correcting variable [%]

Ym.H

-120...120

Limitation of the mean value Ym [%]

L.Ym

0...9999

Max. deviation xw at the start of mean value calculation [phys.

2

100

1 Valid for ConF/ othr/ DP = 0. At DP = 1/ 2/ 3 also 0,1 / 0,01 / 0,001.

SEtP


SP.LO

-1999...9999

Set-point limit low for Weff

SP.Hi

-1999...9999

Set-point limit high for Weff

SP.2

-1999...9999

Set-point 2.

r.SP

t.SP

SP

0...9999

0...9999

-1999...9999

Set-point gradient [/min]

Timer time [min]

Set-point (only visible with BlueControl!)

Default

0

900

0

OFF

5

0

OFF

60

0

0

100

0

5

8

ProG


SP.01

-1999...9999

Segment end set-point 1

Pt.01

0...9999

Segment time 1 [min]

SP.02

-1999...9999


Pt.02

0...9999


SP.03

-1999...9999


Pt.03

0...9999


Default

100 1

10 2

100 1

10 2

200 1

10 2

Operating KS4x-1 38 Parameters



SP.04

-1999...9999


Pt.04

0...9999


1 If SP.01 … SP.04 = OFF then following parameters are not shown

Default

200 1

10 2

2 If segment end set-point = OFF then the segment time is not visible

InP.1


InL.1

-1999...9999

Input value for the lower scaling point

OuL.1

-1999...9999

Displayed value for the lower scaling point

InH.1

-1999...9999

Input value for the upper scaling point

OuH.1

-1999...9999

Displayed value for the lower scaling point t.F1

-1999...9999

Filter time constant [s]

InP.2


InL.2

-1999...9999

Input value for the lower scaling point

OuL.2

-1999...9999

Displayed value for the lower scaling point

InH.2

-1999...9999

Input value for the upper scaling point

OuH.2

-1999...9999

Displayed value for the upper scaling point

Lim

Name

L.1

H.1

HYS.1

L.2

H.2

HYS.2

L.3

H.3

HYS.3


-1999...9999

-1999...9999

0...9999

Lower limit 1

Upper limit 1

-1999...9999

-1999...9999

0...9999

-1999...9999

-1999...9999

0...9999

Hysteresis limit 1

Lower limit 2

Upper limit 2

Hysteresis limit 2

Lower limit 3

Upper limit 3

Hysteresis limit 3

HC.A

-1999...9999

Heat current control limit [A]

Default

0

0

20

20

0,5

Default

0

0

50

50

Default

-10

10

1

OFF

OFF

1

OFF

OFF

1

50 g Resetting the controller configuration to factory setting (Default) r chapter 12.1 (page 56)

Operating KS4x-1 39 Parameters


5.3 Input scaling

When using current or voltage signals as input variables for InP.1 or InP.2, scaling of input and display values at parameter setting level is required. Specification of the input value for lower and higher scaling point is in the relevant electrical unit (mA / V).

phys.

quantity

OuH.x

mA / V phys. quantity

OuL.x

InL.x

InH.x

mA/V

5.3.1 Input Inp.1

g Parameters InL.1 , OuL.1, InH.1 and OuH.1 are only visible if

ConF / InP.1 / Corr = 3 is chosen.

S.tYP

30

(0...20mA)

40

(0...10V)

Input signal

0 … 20 mA

4 … 20 mA

0 … 10 V

2 … 10 V

InL.1

0

4

0

2

OuL.1

any any any any

InH.1

20

20

10

10

OuH.1

any any any any

In addition to these settings, InL.1 and InH.1 can be adjusted in the range

(0...20mA / 0...10V) determined by selection of S.tYP .

a For using the predetermined scaling with thermocouple and resistance thermometer (Pt100), the settings for InL.1 and OuL.1 and for InH.1 and

OuH.1 must have the same value.

g Input scaling changes at calibration level (r page 41) are displayed by input scaling at parameter setting level. After calibration reset (OFF), the scaling parameters are reset to default.

5.3.2 Input InP.2

S.tYP

30

31

Input signal

0 … 20 mA

0 … 50 mA

InL.2

0

0

OuL2 any any

InH.2

20

50

OuH.2

any any

In addition to these settings, InL.2 and InH.2 can be adjusted in the range

(0...20/ 50mA) determined by selection of S.tYP.

Input scaling 40 Operating KS4x-1

Calibration level

6


g Measured value correction ( or 2 is chosen.

CAL)

is only visible if ConF / InP.1 / Corr = 1

The measured value can be matched in the calibration menu ( CAL). Two methods are available:

Offset correction

( ConF/ InP.1 / Corr =1 ): display standard setting offset correction w possible on-line at the process

OuL.1

new

OuL.1

old

InL.1

2-point correction

( ConF/ InP.1 / Corr = 2 ): w is possible off-line with process value simulator display

OuH.1

old

OuH.1

new standard setting

2-point correction

OuL.1

new

OuL.1

old

InL.1

InH.1

X

X

Operating KS4x-1 41


Offset correction ( ConF/ InP.1 / Corr =1 ):

SP.X

126

125 run

Ada

Err r Ù

3 sec.

r

PArA

CAL r Ù r

InP.1

r Ù r r r

InL.1

OuL.1

End r Ù

È

Ì r Ù r Ù

InL.1: The input value of the scaling point is displayed.

The operator must wait, until the process is at rest.

Subsequently, the operator acknowledges the input value by pressing key Ù.

OuL.1: The display value of the scaling point is displayed.

Before calibration, OuL.1 is equal to InL.1.

The operator can correct the display value by pressing keys ÈÌ .

Subsequently, he confirms the display value by pressing key Ù.

42 Operating KS4x-1


2-point correction ( ConF/ InP.1 / Corr =1 ):

SP.X

126

125 run

Ada

Err r Ù

3 sec.

r PArA

Ì

:

CAL r Ù r

InP.1

r Ù r r

InL.1

OuL.1

r Ù

È

Ì r Ù r r

InH.1

OuH.1

r Ù

È

Ì r Ù r

End r Ù

InL.1: The input value of the lower scaling point is displayed.

The operator must adjust the lower input value by means of a process value simulator and confirm the input value by pressing key Ù.

OuL.1: The display value of the lower scaling point is displayed.

Before calibration, OuL.1 equals InL.1.

The operator can correct the lower display value by pressing the ÈÌ keys. Subsequently, he confirms the display value by pressing key Ù.

InH.1: The input value of the upper scaling point is displayed. .

The operator must adjust the upper input value by means of the process value simulator and confirm the input value by pressing key Ù.

OuH.1: The display value of the upper scaling point is displayed.

Before calibration OuH.1 equals InH.1.

The operator can correct the upper display value by pressing keys ÈÌ

Subsequently, he confirms the display value by pressing key Ù.

g The parameters (OuL.1, OuH.1) changed at CAL level can be reset by adjusting the parameters below the lowest adjustment value (OFF) by means of decrement key Ì .

Operating KS4x-1 43

Programmer

7

Programmer

W,X SP.01

W,X

Pt.01

Pt.02

SP.02

Pt.03

SP.03

Pt.04

SP.04

W t

Programmer set-up:

For using the controller as a programmer, select parameter SP.Fn = 1 in the

ConF menu (r page 21). The programmer is started via one of digital inputs di1..3. Which input shall be used for starting the programmer is determined by selecting parameter P.run = 2 / 3 / 4 in the ConF menu accordingly.

(r page 23).

For assigning the program end as a digital signal to one of the relay outputs, parameter P.End = 1 must be selected for the relevant output OUT.1...OUT.3 in the

ConF menu (r page 26, 27).

Programmer parameter setting:

A programmer with 4 segments is available to the user. Determine a segment duration Pt.01 .. Pt.04 (in minutes) and a segment target set-point SP.01 ..

SP.04 for each segment in the PArA menu (r page 38).

Starting/stopping the programmer:

Starting the programmer is done by a digital signal at input di1..3 selected by parameter P.run (r page 23).

The programmer calculates a gradient from segment end setpoint and segment time. This gradient is always valid. Normaly, the programmer starts the first segment at process value. Because of this the effective run-time of the first segment may differ from the at PArA level setted segment time (process value setpoint).

After program end, the controller continues controlling with the target set-point set last.

If the program is stopped during execution (signal at digital input di1..3 is taken away), the programmer returns to program start and waits for a new start signal.

44 Operating KS4x-1

Programmer

+ Program parameter changing while the program is running is possible.

Changing the segment time:

Changing the segment time leads to re-calculation of the required gradient. When the segment time has already elapsed, starting with the new segment is done directly, where the set-point changes with a step.

Changing the segment end setpoint:

Changing the set-point leads to re-calculation of the required gradient, in order to reach the new set-point during the segment rest time, whereby the required gradient polarity sign can change.

Operating KS4x-1 45

Timer

8

Timer

8.1 Setting up the timer

8.1.1 Operating modes

6 different timer modes are available to the user. The relevant timer mode can be set via parameter SP.Fn in the Conf menu (r page 21).

Mode 1 (—)

After timer start, control is to the adjusted set-point . The timer (t.SP) runs as soon as the process value enters or leaves the band around the set-point (x = SP _ b.ti). After timer elapse, the controller returns to Y2.

End and the set-point are displayed alternately in the lower display line.

Mode 2 (····)

Mode 2 corresponds to mode 1, except that control is continued with the relevant set-point after timer (t.SP) elapse.

Mode 3 (—)

After timer start, control is to the adjusted set-point. The timer (t.SP) starts immediately after switch-over. After timer elapsing the controller switches off. End and the set-point are displayed alternately in the bottom display line.

Mode 4 (····)

Mode 4 corresponds to mode 3, except that control is continued with the relevant set-point after timer (t.SP) elapse.

Mode 5 (delay)

The timer starts immediately. The controller output remains on Y2. After timer (t.SP) elapse, control starts with the adjusted set-point.

SP u u

SP

Start

Start

SP blinks run run run t.SP

run t.SP

run

1

2

ò blinks

End

3

4

ò blinks

End

ò blinks

End

Start t.SP

Setting up the timer 46 Operating KS4x-1

Timer

Mode 6

After set-point switch-over (SPr SP.2), control is to SP.2. The timer (t.SP) starts when the process value enters the adjusted band around the set-point (x = SP.2 _ b.ti).

After time elapse the controller returns to SP.

End and the set-point are displayed alternately in the lower display line.

SP.2

u u

SP blinks run

Start run

End

SP t.SP

8.1.2 Tolerance band

Timer modes 1,2 and 6 are provided with a freely adjustable tolerance band. The tolerance band around the set-point can be adjusted via parameter b.ti in the

Conf menu (x = SP.2 _ b.ti )

(r page 21).

8.1.3 Timer start

Various procedures for starting the timer are possible:

Start via

Pressing key Ò

Power On

LOGI

Y2

= di1 2

Mode

SP.2

=

1 2 3 4 5 6 x d d d d d di2 3 di3 4 di1 x di2 x di3 x

6

0 x x x d d d d d x d d d d d -

2 - - - - - d

3 - - - - - d

4 - - - - - d x d d d d d x d d d d d -

0 - - - - - d x d d d d d d

Serial interface (if provided)

1

LOGI) ( key function) x no effect x x d d d d d d

Operating KS4x-1 47 Setting up the timer

Timer

8.1.4 Signal end

If one of the relays shall switch after timer elapse, parameter TimE = 1 and inverse action O.Act = 1 must be selected for the relevant output OUT.1 …

OUT.3 in the ConF menu (r page 25, 26). If direct action is selected, the relevant output signals the active timer.

8.2 Determining the timer run-time

The timer run-time can be determined via parameter t.SP in the PArA menu.

The timer run-time must be specified in minutes with one digit behind the decimal point (0,1 minutes = 6 seconds).

Alternatively, the timer run-time can be determined directly at extended operating level (r chapter 8.3).

8.3 Starting the timer

Dependent of configuration, the timer start is as follows: w by a positive flank at one of digital inputs di1..3

w by pressing key Ò w by switching on the controller (power On) w by changing the timer run-time t.ti > 0

(extended operating level) w via the serial interface

Display:

Run LED blinks lit off

( End and setpoint are displayed alternately)

SP.x

126

125

Signification

- timer was started

- timer is not running yet

- timer was started

- timer is running

- timer is off

- timer has elapsed

- deletion of End display by pressing any key run

Ada

Err g With active timer, the time can be adjusted by changing parameter t.ti at extended operating level.

Determining the timer run-time 48 Operating KS4x-1

BlueControl

9

BlueControl

BlueControl is the projection environment for the BluePort controller series of

PMA. The following 3 versions with graded functionality are available:

The mini version is - free of charge - at your disposal as download at PMA homepage www.pma-online.de or on the PMA-CD (please ask for).

At the end of the installation the licence number has to be stated or

DEMO mode must be chosen.

At DEMO mode the licence number can be stated subsequently under Help r

Licence r

Change.

Operating KS4x-1 49

Versions

10

Versions

Accessories delivered with the unit

Operating manual (if selected by the ordering code) w 2 fixing clamps w operating note in 15 languages

Accessory equipment with ordering information

Description

Heating current transformer 50A AC

PC-adaptor for the front-panel interface

Standard rail adaptor

Operating manual

Operating manual

Operating manual

Interface description Modbus RTU

Interface description Modbus RTU




German

English

French

German

English

Mini

Basic

Expert

Order no.

9404-407-50001

9407-998-00001

9407-998-00061

9499-040-62718

9499-040-62711

9499-040-62732

9499-040-63518

9499-040-63511

Download www.pma-online.de

9407-999-11001

9407-999-11011

50 Operating KS4x-1

Technical data

11

Technical data

INPUTS

PROCESS VALUE INPUT INP1

Resolution:

Decimal point:

> 14 bits

0 to 3 digits behind the decimal point

Dig. input filter: adjustable 0,000...9999 s

Scanning cycle: 100 ms

Measured value correction:

2-point or offset correction

Thermocouples r Table 1 (page 53 )

Input resistance:

Effect of source resistance:

³ 1 MW

1 mV/W

Cold-junction compensation

Maximal additional error: 0,5 K

Sensor break monitoring

Sensor current:

Configurable output action

£ 1 mA

Resistance thermometer r Table 2 (page 53 )

Connection:

Lead resistance:

2 or 3-wire max. 30 Ohm

Input circuit monitor: break and short circuit

Special measuring range

BlueControl (engineering tool) can be used to match the input to sensor KTY 11-6

(characteristic is stored in the controller).

Physical measuring range:

Linearization segments

0...4500 Ohm

16 r Table 3 (page 53 )

Span start, end of span:

Scaling:

Linearization: anywhere within measuring range selectable -1999...9999

16 segments, adaptable with

Decimal point:

BlueControl adjustable

Input circuit monitor: 12,5%belowspanstart(2mA,1V)

SUPPLEMENTARY INPUT INP2

Resolution: > 14 bits

Scanning cycle: 100 ms

Accuracy: < 0,5 %

Heating current measurement via current transformer ( Accessory equipment)

Measuring range: 0...50mA AC

Scaling: adjustable -1999...0,000...9999 A

Current measuring range

Technical data as for INP1

CONTROL INPUT DI1

Configurable as switch or push-button!

Connection of a potential-free contact suitable for switching “dry” circuits.

Switched voltage:

Current:

2,5 V

50 mA

CONTROL INPUTS DI2, DI3 (OPTION)

Configurable as switch or push-button!

Optocoupler input for active triggering

Nominal voltage

Current sink (IEC 1131 type 1)

Logic “0”

Logic “1”

Current requirement

24 V DC external

-3...5 V

15...30 V approx.. 5 mA

TRANSMITTER SUPPLY U

T

(OPTION)

Power: 22 mA / ³ 18 V

If the universal output OUT3 is used there may be no external galvanic connection between measuring and output circuits!

GALVANIC ISOLATION

Safety isolation

Function isolation

Process value input INP1

Supplementary input INP2

Digital input di1

Relay outputs OUT 1,2 RS422/485 interface

Relay output OUT3 Digital inputs di2, 3

Universal output OUT3

Transmitter supply U

T

OUTPUTS

RELAY OUTPUTS OUT1, OUT2

Contact type: 2 NO contacts with common connection

Max. contact rating: 500 VA, 250 V, 2A at 48...62Hz, resistive load

Min. contact rating: 6V, 1 mA DC

Operating KS4x-1 51

Technical data

Operating life

(electr.):

800.000 duty cycles with max.

rating

OUT3 USED AS RELAY OUTPUT

Contact type: potential-free changeover contact

Max.contact rating: 500 VA, 250 V, 2A at 48...62Hz, resistive load

Min. contact rating: 5V, 10 mA AC/DC

Operating life

(electr.):

600.000 duty cycles with max.

contact rating

Note:

If the relays OUT1...OUT3 operate external contactors, these must be fitted with RC snubber circuits to manufacturer specifications to prevent excessive switch-off voltage peaks.

OUT3 AS UNIVERSAL OUTPUT

Galvanically isolated from the inputs.

Freely scalable

Resolution: 11 bits

Current output

0/4...20 mA configurable.

Signal range:

Max. load:

Load effect:

Resolution:

Accuracy

0...approx.22mA

£ 500 W no effect

£ 22 mA (0,1%)

£ 40 mA (0,2%)

Voltage output

0/2...10V configurable

Signal range:

Min. load:

Load effect:

Resolution:

Accuracy

0...11 V

³ 2 kW no effect

£ 11 mV (0,1%)

£ 20 mV (0,2%)

OUT3 used as transmitter supply

Output power: 22 mA / ³ 13 V

OUT3 used as logic output

Load £ 500 W

Load > 500 W

0/£ 20 mA

0/> 13 V

POWER SUPPLY

Dependent of order:

AC SUPPLY

Voltage:

Frequency:

90...260 V AC

48...62 Hz

Power consumption approx. 7,0 VA

UNIVERSAL SUPPLY 24 V UC

AC voltage:

Frequency:

DC voltage:

Power consumption:

20,4...26,4 V AC

48...62 Hz

18...31 V DC approx.. 7,0 VA

BEHAVIOUR WITH POWER FAILURE

Configuration, parameters and adjusted set-points, control mode:

Non-volatile storage in EEPROM

BLUEPORT FRONT INTERFACE

Connection of PC via PC adapter (see

"Accessory equipment"). The BlueControl software is used to configure, set parameters and operate the KS4x-1.

BUS INTERFACE (OPTION)

Galvanically isolated

Physical:

Protocol:

RS 422/485

Modbus RTU

Transmission speed: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200 bits/sec

Address range: 1...247

Number of controllers per bus: 32

Repeaters must be used to connect a higher number of controllers.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Protection modes

Front panel:

Housing:

Terminals:

IP 65 (NEMA 4X)

IP 20

IP 00

Permissible temperatures

For specified accuracy: 0...60°C

Warm-up time:

For operation:

For storage:

³ 15 minutes

-20...65°C

-40...70°C

Humidity

75% yearly average, no condensation

Shock and vibration

Vibration test Fc (DIN 68-2-6)

Frequency: 10...150 Hz

Unit in operation: 1g or 0,075 mm

Unit not in operation: 2g or 0,15 mm

Shock test Ea (DIN IEC 68-2-27)

Shock:

Duration:

15g

11ms

52 Operating KS4x-1

Technical data

Electromagnetic compatibility

Complies with EN 61 326-1

(for continuous, non-attended operation)

GENERAL

Housing

Material: Makrolon 9415 flame-retardant

Flammability class: UL 94 VO, self-extinguishing

Plug-in module, inserted from the front

Safety test

Complies with EN 61010-1 (VDE 0411-1):

Overvoltage category II

Contamination class 2

Working voltage range 300 V

Protection class II

Certifications

Type-tested to DIN 3440

For use in: w Heat generating plants with outflow temperatures up to 120°C to DIN 4751 w Hot water plants with outflow temperatures above 110°C to DIN 4752 w Thermal transfer plants with organic transfer media to DIN 4754 w Oil-heated plants to DIN 4755 cUL certification

(Type 4x, indoor use)

File: E 208286

For compliance with cUL certificate,the following information must be taken into account: w Use only 60 / 75 or 75°C copper (Cu) wire.

w Tighten the terminal- screws with a torque of 0,5 - 0,6 Nm

Mounting

Panel mounting with two fixing clamps at top/bottom or right/left,

High-density mounting possible

Mounting position: uncritical

Weight: 0,27kg

Accessories delivered with the unit

Operating manual

Fixing clamps

Table 1 Thermocouple measuring ranges

Thermocouple type

L Fe-CuNi (DIN)

J Fe-CuNi

K NiCr-Ni

N Nicrosil/Nisil

S PtRh-Pt 10%

R PtRh-Pt 13%

Range

-100...900°C

-100...1200°C

-100...1350°C

-100...1300°C

0...1760°C

0...1760°C

-148...1652°F

-148...2192°F

-148...2462°F

-148...2372°F

32...3200°F

32...3200°F

Table 2 Resistance transducer measuring ranges

Type

Pt100

Pt100

Pt1000

KTY 11-6

Sens. current Range

-200...100°C

0,2mA

-200...850°C

-200...850°C

-50...150°C

-140...212°F

-140...1562°F

-140...1562°F

-58...302°F

Table 3 Current and voltage measuring ranges

Range

0-10 Volt

0-20 mA

Input resistance

~ 110 kW

49 W (voltage requirement ß 2,5 V)

Accuracy

ß 2K

ß 2K

ß 2K

ß 2K

ß 2K

ß 2K

Accuracy

ß 1K

ß 1K

ß 2K

ß 2K

Accuracy

ß 0,1 %

ß 0,1 %

Operating KS4x-1 53

Resolution (Ô)

0,1 K

0,1 K

0,2 K

0,2 K

0,2 K

0,2 K

Resolution (Ô)

0,1K

0,1K

0,1K

0,05K

Resolution (Ô)

ß 0,6 mV

ß 1,5 mA

Safety hints

12

Safety hints

This unit was built and tested in compliance with VDE 0411-1 / EN 61010-1 and was delivered in safe condition.

The unit complies with European guideline 89/336/EWG (EMC) and is provided with CE marking.

The unit was tested before delivery and has passed the tests required by the test schedule. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, the user must follow the hints and warnings given in this operating manual.

The unit is intended exclusively for use as a measurement and control instrument in technical installations.

a Warning

If the unit is damaged to an extent that safe operation seems impossible, the unit must not be taken into operation.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

The electrical wiring must conform to local standards (e.g. VDE 0100). The input measurement and control leads must be kept separate from signal and power supply leads.

In the installation of the controller a switch or a circuit-breaker must be used and signified. The switch or circuit-breaker must be installed near by the controller and the user must have easy access to the controller.

COMMISSIONING

Before instrument switch-on, check that the following information is taken into account: w Ensure that the supply voltage corresponds to the specifications on the type label.

w All covers required for contact protection must be fitted.

w If the controller is connected with other units in the same signal loop, check that the equipment in the output circuit is not affected before switch-on. If necessary, suitable protective measures must be taken.

w The unit may be operated only in installed condition.

w Before and during operation, the temperature restrictions specified for controller operation must be met.

SHUT-DOWN

For taking the unit out of operation, disconnect it from all voltage sources and protect it against accidental operation.

If the controller is connected with other equipment in the same signal loop, check that other equipment in the output circuit is not affected before switch-off. If necessary, suitable protective measures must be taken.

54 Operating KS4x-1

Safety hints a

MAINTENANCE, REPAIR AND MODIFICATION

The units do not need particular maintenance.

Warning

When opening the units, or when removing covers or components, live parts and terminals may be exposed.

Before starting this work, the unit must be disconnected completely.

After completing this work, re-shut the unit and re-fit all covers and components.

Check if specifications on the type label must be changed and correct them, if necessary.

l Caution

When opening the units, components which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) can be exposed. The following work may be done only at workstations with suitable ESD protection.

Modification, maintenance and repair work may be done only by trained and authorized personnel. For this purpose, the PMA service should be contacted.

a The cleaning of the front of the controller should be done with a dry or a wetted

(spirit, water) kerchief.

Operating KS4x-1 55

Safety hints

12.1 Resetting to factory setting

In case of faultyconfiguration, KS4x-1 can be reset to the default condition.

4 1

ÌÈ

+ Power on

1.

SP.x

FAC

torY

Ada

Err run

2.

SP.x

FAC

no

run

Ada

Err

2

È

SP.x

FAC

YES

run

Ada

Err

3

Ù

SP.x

FAC

COPY

run

Ada

Err

SP.x

8.8.8.8.

8.8.8.8.

run

Ada

Err

1 For this, the operator must keep the keys increment and decrement pressed during power-on.

2 Then, press key increment to select YES.

3 Confirm factory resetting with Enter and the copy procedure is started

(display COPY).

4 Afterwards the device restarts.

In all other cases, no reset will occur (timeout abortion).

g If one of the operating levels was blocked and the safety lock is open, reset to factory setting is not possible.

g If a pass number was defined (via BlueControl ®

3. A wrong pass number aborts the reset action.

) and the safety lock is open, but no operating level was blocked, enter the correct pass number when prompted in g The copy procedure ( COPY) can take some seconds.

Now, the transmitter is in normal operation.

Resetting to factory setting 56 Operating KS4x-1

Index

0-9

2-point correction. . . . . . . . . . . . 41

A

Alarm handling . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 19

B

BlueControl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Bus interface

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . 52

C

Calibration level (CAL) . . . . . . 41 - 43

Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Configuration examples

2-point controller . . . . . . . . 31

3-point controller . . . . . . . . 32

3-point stepping controller . . . 33

Continuous controller . . . . . . 34

D - Y -Off controller. . . . . . . 35

Measured value output . . . . . 36

Signaller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Configuration level

Configuration parameters. . 22 - 28

Parameter survey . . . . . . . . 21

Connecting diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Connecting examples di2/3, 2-wire transmitter supply . 8

INP2 current transformer . . . . . 7

OUT1/2 heating/cooling . . . . . 7

OUT3 as logic output . . . . . . . 8

OUT3 transmitter supply . . . . . 8

RS485 interface . . . . . . . . . . 9

Control inputs di1, di2, di3

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . 51

Current signal measuring range . . . . 51

D

Digital inputs di1, di2, di3

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 26

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . 51

E

Environmental conditions . . . . . . . 53

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Error list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

F

Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

I

Input INP1

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 23

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . 51

Input INP2

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 23

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . 51

Input scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

K

Kalibrierung (CAL) . . . . . . . . . . 41

L

LED

Ada - LED . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Err - LED . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

ì - LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

LED colours . . . . . . . . . . . 10

ò - LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 run - LED . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

SP.x - LED. . . . . . . . . . . . 10

M

Maintenance manager . . . . . . . 12 - 13

Manual tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

O

Offset correction . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Output OUT1

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 24

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . 52

Output OUT2

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 25

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . 52

Output OUT3

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 25

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . 52

P

Parameter setting level

Parameter survey . . . . . . . . 37

Parameters . . . . . . . . . 38 - 39

Operating KS4x-1 57

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Programmer

Changing segment end setpoint . 45

Changing segment time . . . . . 45

Parameter setting . . . . . . . . 44

Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Starting/Stopping . . . . . . . . 44

R

Resetting to factory setting . . . . . . . 56

S

Safety hints . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 - 56

Safety switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Safety test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Self-tuning

Cancelation . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Cancelation causes. . . . . . . . 16

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Set-point processing . . . . . . . . . . 29

T

Thermocouple measuring range . . . . 51

Timer

Display run-LED . . . . . . . . 48

Operating modes. . . . . . . . . 46

Signal end . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Timer start . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Tolerance band . . . . . . . . . 47

V

Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Voltage signal measuring range . . . . 51

58 Operating KS4x-1

Operating KS4x-1 59

9499-040-62711

Subject to alterations without notice

Änderungen vorbehalten

Sours réserve de toutes modifications

© PMA Prozeß- und Maschinen-Automation GmbH

P.O.B. 310 229, D-34058 Kassel, Germany

Printed in Germany 9499-040-62711 (07/2004)

A6

! " # $ % #

"

!

#

%

0

!

& '

! ! !'

!

!

! 1

1!& !

2 !

" !

(

* !

*8

$ !

!

!

#

$

./

!

( )* + ,

!

( $*

' ) + ( +

./

! 1

!

!

3 4!

56/

56/

,7 7

7 7

%

$# # &

' (" #) #

*

)

* ) !

).>

3 >

3 C

) !

!

# 8

&

! !

!

# 8

!

!

1 !

!

!

!!

# ?

A 8' B

!

1 ' !

A 8' B

! = !

.

*

1).

!@

>

%

$#

1

# & . )

' (" #) #

. )

!'

D !

./

.

.

!@

1).

%

$# # & . )

' (" #) #

. )

1

1 !

./

!'

./

%

/#%

$#

C* )>

> )>

C

& !

# & /#%#

' (" #) #

/#%#

1 !

1 !

1 !

1 !

1 !

8 !

1

1

!

8 =

! ! & ! 8 =

!

!

!

!

!

!

*

*

7

7

7

7

*

7

7 ! !+ 9!

7 .$ !

!

: !

!

7 <

=

!

8 !

!

7 & ! 8 ! @

!!

!

;

7 !

!

!

7

7 8 !

7 )* :

! 7 +

D !

*

7

7 !

7 & ! 8

7

11

7 & ! 8

7 & ! 8

>""

11

11

11

11

!

!

!

!

);

)

+

+

+

+

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

9

9

%

$#

0

" ) !

@

>

)

)

1" !

1

# & 0 )

' (" #) #

0 )

!

!

1 !

! ! @

!

./ 1

./ 1

"6%

%

$#

0

" ) !

@

>

)

)

1" !

1

# & 0 )

' (" #) #

0 )

!

!

./ 1

./ 1

"6%

!

1 !

! ! @

0

" !@

" !

" !

"

1" !

%

$#

1

# & 0 )

' (" #) #

0 )

!' 1 "6%

E

E

"6%

@

)

*

>

F

F

%

$#

/01.

>

1$.

# & / #"

' (" #) #

/ #"

1

1

# ? 1 !

9!

! !

! !

!

!

!

! +

!

11

)+< ? ' # ?

!

!

!

1 !

& ! 8

*

7

7

7

7

7

7 !

*

7

7

7

7

7

7

!

*

7 ( !

7

7 !

! ! ' : ! ;

*

7 ! 1

7 ! 1

7 ! 1

7 ! 1

7 ! 1

7 ! 1

7 ! 1

7

7

7 ! 1

!

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

+

+

+

+

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

* F>

FG

* 1

)

F9

> !

2

%

$#

6 !

* 1

*

# & 0 2

' (" #) #

0 2

!

& ! 8

!

!

' A B

+ CD

! !

11

9!

!

! 8

&

!

1

# !

!

%

% &

' (" #) #

!

@

!

!

#

@ >

@ C

@

!

!

!

!

' !

!

#

!

#

A 8' B

A B

A B

A B

& ! !

! !

& ?

! AEB

AEB

AEB

%

%

)

>"

C

& ) #

' (" #) #

) #

&

! !

! !

! !

! !

! ! A 8' B

A 8' B

A 8' B

A+ B

%

%

1

&

' (" #) #

%%

%%

*

7

7 *

! # 8 !8

7

7

7

7

7

11

7 # ?

#

#

#

1 G

7 # ?

7 # ?

' CD

!

*

*

*

11

+

+

+

+

,

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

.

!

. >

" >

. C

" C

%

% & . )

' (" #) #

. )

&

&

1 !

!

!

! !

!

! !

A B

A 8' B

A 8' B

A 8' B

A 8' B

.

. >

" >

. C

" C

%

% & . )

' (" #) #

. )

&

&

!

! !

!

! !

A 8' B

A 8' B

A 8' B

A 8' B

%

/#%

%

>

C

C@

& /#%#

' (" #) #

/#%#

&

8' !

!

A 8' B

!

A 8' B

A 8' B

*

*

*

+

+

+

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

9

*#(#,

-

9

9

9

'#() 3

% ' (" #) #

45 5 )

%

# 6

' (" #) #

" # 5#

%# 7

)# 5 (" #) #

%

)

)

)

)

)

)

),

)

)

)

)

H

H

>

/

( )*+$*

( )*+$*

)

)

"6% /"

"6% * + "6% *

) "6% /"

)I "6% *

"6% -(

./ C*

./ C*

-

./ - )

= ./ )

' (" #) #

8 !

!

J

!

!

Brief adjustment instructions

1

• After installation ( → page 24) and electrical connection

( → page 26),

• apply the operating voltage.

After approx. 15 s the unit is ready.

• Allow the medium to flow through the system at the required maximmum flow rate.

2

M S

6-8 s

LO

LO

LO

HI

HI

HI

Press the Learn/Set button and keep it pressed.

The green LEDs on the right and on the left flash, after 5 s the LED bar (green) fills from left to right

(release the button now).

The indication goes off briefly.

The unit stores the current flow as maximum flow and passes into the operating mode.

After this procedure the unit is ready for normal operation.

• This setting is sufficient for the majority of waterbased applications. Optional: adjustment to minimum flow ( → page 27)

• If needed, set the switch point (for changing the reaction time and excess gain, → page 27).

Manual setting options

• Manual adjustment to maximum flow ( → page 27).

• Manual adjustment to maximum flow / monitoring and optical indication of excess flow ( → page 27).

• Manual adjustment to minimum flow / flow standstill

( → page 28).

• Activate / deactivate the function for remote adjustment

( → page 28).

20

Controls and visual indication

setting buttons

MODE /

ENTER

LO

FLOW RATE

LEARN /

SET

HI

function display

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Function display (Run mode)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 current flow within the display range

(LED bar green)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 excess flow (LED 9 flashes) underflow (LED 0 flashes)

Indication of the switch point (SP):

LED orange: flow ≥ SP; LED red: flow < SP

Setting buttons

Mode / Enter: selection of the menu items and acknowledgement

Learn/Set: adjustment to maximum / minimum flow; setting of values (scrolling by holding pressed;incremental by pressing briefly)

SID 701657/02 21

LO

Menu structure

Run mode

HI

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Adjustment to maximum flow

Manual settings

Adjustment to maximum flow

6-8s

Adjustment to minimum flow

11-15s

2x

>5s

1x

Monitoring excess flow

Setting the switch point

1x

>5s

1x

Activate / deactivate the function for remote adjustment

4x

> 5s

1x

2x

>5s

...

1x

Adjustment to minimum flow

3x

>5s

1x

22

LED = green LED = orange LED = red

701657/02 SID

Contents

Function and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 23

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 24

Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27

Installation and set-up / Operation / Maintenance . . . . . . . page 29

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29

Programming diagrams / Technical information . . . . . . . . . page 30

Function and features

The flow monitor

• detects the flow velocity in liquid and gaseous media

• switches the output according to the programming

(N.O./ or N.C./ , programmmable by wiring; → page 26)

• and indicates the relative flow value within the adjustable detection range by means of LEDs:

- LED 0 = lower limit of the detection range (maximum value / LO)

- LED 9 = upper limit of the detection range (minimum value / HI)

• It is also possible to indicate:

- Switching status (LED red: flow below the switch point,

LED orange: flow has reached the switch point).

- Excess flow: LED 9 flashes if the flow is considerably higher

(2 LEDs) than the display range.

- Underflow / flow standstill: LED 0 flashes if the flow is lower than the display range.

23

Installation

The unit is adaptable for various process fittings (adapters to be ordered separately as accessories).

• In the case of horizontal pipes mount the unit from the side, if possible (fig. 1).

When the unit is to be mounted at the bottom of the pipe, it should be free from deposits.

When the unit is to be mounted at the top of the pipe, it should be completely filled with the medium to be monitored.

• In the case of vertical pipes mount the unit in a place where the medium flows upwards (fig. 2).

1 2

To avoid malfunction a minimum distance between the flow monitor and bends, valves, changes in cross-section or such like must be observed:

• Min. 5 x pipe diameter upstream (A),

• min. 3 x pipe diameter downstream (B).

3

D min.

3 x D

B min.

5 x D

A

24

1 2 3 thread M18 x 1.5

1. Lubricate the nut (3) and all threads with grease to ensure the nut can be loosened and tightened several times.

Note: No grease must be applied to the sensor tip (A).

2. Screw the suitable adapter (2) onto the process fitting (1).

3. Insert the flow monitor into the adapter. While keeping the unit aligned tighten the nut (3); (max. tightening torque 50 Nm).

Insertion depth of the sensor: min. 12 mm in the pipe. When the

adapters are used which are available as accessories, the correct depth is ensured.

Note: The sensor tip must not touch the pipe wall.

mounting dimension with M12 adapter mounting dimension with G¼ adapter mounting dimension with G½ adapter

25

Electrical connection

The unit must only be connected by an electrician.

The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical equipment must be observed.

Voltage supply to EN50178, SELV, PELV.

The device shall be supplied from an isolating source and protected by an overcurrent device such that the limited voltage circuit requirements in accordance with UL 508 are met.

Disconnect power before connecting the unit.

Wiring ( = N.O. / = N.C.):

PNP units

1 BN

4 BK

3 BU

2 WH

L+

L-

P

3 BU

4 BK

1 BN

2 WH

L+

L-

P connector view (sensor)

1

2 4

3

NPN units

1

4

3

2

BN

BK

BU

WH

L+

L-

P

3 BU

4 BK

1 BN

2 WH

L+

L-

P connector view (sensor)

2

1

3

4

P = programming wire (for remote adjustment)

Core colours of ifm sockets:

1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black)

If the function for remote adjustment is active:

Use 4-wire connection cables without a link between pins 2 and 4.

With 3-wire sockets with a link between pin 2 and pin 4 switching of the output stage triggers the remote adjustment!

Failure indication: In the case of a short circuit the function indication and the red LED row are lit alternately.

26

Programming

■ Setting of the detection range (→ page 30)

• Allow the medium to flow through the system at the required maximum flow rate.

• Press the Learn/Set button for 6-8 s (= adjustment to maximum flow / upper limit of the detection range).

This setting is sufficient for the majority of waterbased applications.

Optional: adjustment to minimum flow.

• Allow the medium to flow through the system at the required minimum flow rate or bring flow to a standstill.

• Press the Learn/Set button for 11-15 s (= adjustment to minimum flow or flow standstill / lower limit of the detection range).

■ Remote adjustment via programming wire

Apply the operating voltage (+U

B

) to pin 2 for the respective time.

■ Setting of the switch point (→ page 32)

• Press the Mode/Enter button briefly.

• Press the Learn/Set button for 5 s,

• keep the Learn/Set button pressed or press the button several times until the requested switch point is set.


■ Manual adjustment to maximum flow (HI-Teach) (→ page 33)


• Press the Mode/Enter button twice.

• Press the Learn/Set button for 5 s, release the button when LED bar fills from left to right.

• Press the Mode/Enter button briefly, when LED 9 is lit.

■ Manual adjustment to maximum flow (HI-Teach) / monitoring

excess flow (

→ page 34)


• Press the Mode/Enter button twice.

• Press the Learn/Set button for 5 s, release the button when LED bar fills from left to right.

• When LED 9 (= LED for the maximum display value) is lit: Press the

Learn/Set button several times to shift the LED.


27

■ Manual adjustment to minimum flow (LO-Teach) (→ page 35)

• Allow the medium to flow through the system at the required minimum flow rate or bring flow to a standstill.

• Press the Mode/Enter button three times.

• Press the Learn/Set button for 5 s, release the button when LED bar fills from right to left.

• Press the Mode/Enter button briefly, when LED 0 is lit.

■ Activate / deactivate the function for remote adjustment

( → page 36)

• Press the Mode/Enter button four times.

• Press the Learn/Set button for 5 s,

• keep the Learn/Set button pressed or press the button several times until the requested function is set (function active, when 3 LEDs

on the right and 3 LEDs left are lit green; function not active,

when the 4 LEDs in the middle are lit in red).


■ The following applies to all setting procedures:

• If no button is pressed for 20 s during the setting procedure, the unit returns to the operating mode with the parameter values unchanged.

• If adjustment has not been possible, all the red LEDs flash. The unit returns to the operating mode with the parameter values unchanged.

■ Locking / Unlocking

The unit can be electronically locked to prevent unwanted adjustment of the set parameters: Press both setting buttons for 10 s (the unit must be in Run mode). Indication goes out briefly (acknowledgement of locking / unlocking).

Units are delivered from the factory in the unlocked state.

If the unit is locked, it is possible to indicate

• the current switch point (press the Mode/Enter button once) and

• the setting of the function for remote adjustment (press the

Mode/Enter button two times).

28

Installation and set-up / Operation / Maintenance

After mounting, wiring and setting check whether the unit operates correctly.

At power on, all LEDs light and go off one after the other.* The unit is then ready for operation.

*During this time the output is switched according to the programming: ON with the NO function and OFF with the NC function.

Failure indication: In the case of a short circuit the function indicati-

on and the red LED row are lit alternately.

Recommended maintenance

Check the sensor tip for build-up from time to time. Clean it with a soft cloth. If necessary, build-up which adheres firmly (e.g. lime) can be removed with a common vinegar cleansing agent.

Technical data

Operating voltage [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ... 36 DC 1)

Current rating [mA]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400; short-circuit protection; reverse polarity protection / overload protection

Voltage drop [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 2.5

Current consumption [mA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 80

Liquids

Medium temperature [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25 ... +80

Setting range [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ... 300

Greatest sensitivity [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ... 60

Max. temperature gradient of medium [K/min] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Gases


Setting range [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ... 3000

Greatest sensitivity [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ... 800

Response time [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ... 10

Power-on delay time [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, optically indicated

Pressure rating [bar]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Operating temperature [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25 ... +80

Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 67 (IEC 60529) / UL50)

Housing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBT-GF 20

Material sensor surface (SI10xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stainless steel (316S12);

O-ring: FPM 8x1.5 gr 80° Shore A

Material sensor surface (SI11xx) titanium; O-ring: FPM 8x1.5 gr 80° Shore A

1) to EN50178, SELV, PELV; referring to UL: see page 26 (Electrical connection).

29

Programming diagrams / Technical information

■ Setting of the detection range

The detection range (window) is determined by:

• Adjustment to the required maximum flow (HI-Teach)

= upper limit of the window.

This setting is sufficient for the majority of waterbased applications.

• Adjustment to the required minimum flow / flow standstill

(LO-Teach) = lower limit of the window.

0

LO

LO HI

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

HI sensor signal

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LO

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

HI

• Adjustment to maximum flow (HI-Teach)

The unit detects the current flow and sets this value as the maximum value for the LED display (LED 9).

1

Apply the operating voltage. After approx. 15 s the unit is ready.

Allow the medium to flow through the system at the required

maximum flow rate.

2

M S

6-8 s

LO

LO

HI

HI




LO HI



30

• Adjustment to minimum flow / flow standstill (LO-Teach),

optional

The unit detects the current flow and sets this value as the minimum display value for the LED display. In normal operation the first green

LED (LED 0) flashes when the flow falls below this value (or when it comes to a standstill).

NOTE: The LO-Teach operation may only be carried out after the HI-

Teach operation.

1 Allow the medium to flow through the system at the required minimum flow rate or bring to a standstill.

M S

11-15 s

LO

LO

HI

HI



2

LO HI after a further 5 s the LED bar

(gren) fills from right to left


LO HI


The unit stores the current flow as minimum flow and passes into the operating mode.

• Remote adjustment

You can also adjust the unit via the programming wire, if the function for remote adjustment is active. Apply the operating voltage (+U

B

) to pin 2 (P) for the respective time: min. 6 s / max. 8 s for HI-Teach; min.

11s / max. 15 s for HI-Teach.

If the operating voltage is applied to pin 2 for more than 15 s,

• the adjustment does not become effective; the unit passes into the operating mode with unchanged values,

• the unit is locked (the buttons are inactive as long as the operating voltage is applied).

31

■ Setting of the switch point

The switch point is preset at the factory (LED 7). The setting influences the reaction time of the unit.

• High switch point = fast reaction in the case of flow decrease.

• Low switch point = fast reaction in the case of flow increase.

1

2

3

M S

1 x

M S

>5 s

M S

LO

LO

LO

LO

HI

HI

HI

HI

Press the Mode/Enter button briefly. The current switch point is indicated:

LED lit: coarse setting, LED flashes: fine setting.


After 5 s the switch point is increased* (incremental by pressing briefly or scrolling by holding pressed).

Indication:

The flashing LED moves from left to right. After LED 9 has been reached the cycle starts again at

LED 0. The LED which is constantly lit moves on by one position.**

Press the Mode/Enter button briefly (acknowledgement).


The set switch point becomes effective; the unit passes into the operating mode.

*Decrease the switch point: Let the flashing and lit LEDs move to the maximum setting value. Then the cycle starts again at the minimum setting value.

**Overflow: If the flashing LED and the lit LED exceed the maximum setting value, the cycle starts again at the minimum setting value.

32

■ Manual adjustment to maximum flow (HI-Teach)


In normal operation all LEDs are lit in green when the max. flow is reached. They go out step by step as the flow decreases.

1




M S

2

LO HI

Press the Mode/Enter button twice.

LED 9 flashes.

2 x

M S

3 >5 s

LO

LO

HI

HI


after 5 s the LED bar (green) fills from left to right

(release the button now), after this LED 9 is lit.

4

M S

LO HI




33

■ Manual adjustment to maximum flow (HI-Teach) /

monitoring excess flow


In addition the position of the display window within the detection range can be defined: Shift the LED for the maximum display value to position 8, 7, 6 or 5. In the case of maximum flow all LEDs from 0 up to this LED are lit. The LEDs above the range signal excess flow. If the switch point is above this range, the unit switches in the case of excess flow.

1




M S

2

LO HI

Press the Mode/Enter button twice.

LED 9 flashes.

2 x

M S

3 >5 s

LO

LO

HI

HI

Press the Learn/Set button and keep it pressed, after 5 s the LED bar (green) fills from left to right


4

5

M S

M S

LO

LO

HI

HI

Press the Learn/Set button several times until the requested

LED lights (LED 8, 7, 6 or 5).

Each time the button is pressed the LED moves back by one position.

When it is lower than LED 5 the cycle starts again at LED 9.




34

■ Manual adjustment to minimum flow (LO-Teach)

The unit detects the current flow and sets this value as the minimum display value for the LED display. In normal operation the first green

LED (LED 0) flashes when the flow falls below this value (or when it comes to a standstill).

NOTE: The LO-Teach operation may only be carried out after the HI-

Teach operation.

1 Allow the medium to flow through the system at the required

minimum flow rate or bring to a standstill.

2

M S

LO HI

Press the Mode/Enter button three times.

LED 0 flashes.

3 x

M S

3

4

>5 s

M S

LO

LO

LO

HI

HI


after 5 s the LED bar (green) fills from right to left


HI



The unit stores the current flow as minimum flow and passes into the operating mode.

35

■ Activate / deactivate the function for remote adjustment

If the function is active, the unit can be adjusted by applying voltage to pin 2.

Unit supplied: function active.

Function active

LO HI The 3 LEDs on the right and left are lit in green.*

Function not active

LO HI

The 4 LEDs in the middle are lit in red.*

*The LEDs flash if voltage is applied to pin 2.

1

2

M S

4 x

M S

>5 s

LO

LO

LO

HI

Press the Mode/Enter button four times.

The current setting is indicated.

HI

Press the Learn/Set button and keep it pressed,

HI after 5 s the function changes.

(Each time the Learn/Set button is pressed the function changes again).

3

M S

LO HI

Press the Mode/Enter button briefly (= acknowledgement).

The indication goes off briefly, the unit then passes into the operating mode.

If the function for remote adjustment is active and the operating voltage is applied to pin 2 for more than 15 s, the unit is locked (the buttons are inactive as long as the operating voltage is applied).

Use 4-wire connection cables without a link between pins 2 and 4.

With 3-wire sockets with a link between pin 2 and pin 4 switching of the output stage triggers the remote adjustment!

36

Hysteresis function

flow maximum flow switch point (SP) hysteresis minimum flow

OUT

OUT

1

0

1

0 t

When the flow rises, the output switches when the switch point (SP) has been reached.

When the flow falls again, the output switches back when the value

"SP minus hysteresis" has been reached.

The hysteresis is considerably influenced by the choice of the operating range on the sensitivity curve of the sensor:

• In the case of adjustment to HI-Flow values in the range 0 ... 60cm/s the hysteresis is 2 - 4 cm/s (values apply to water).

• In the case of adjustment to HI-Flow values above 100 cm/s the hysteresis increases as the flow rises.

The typical response time of the unit is 3 ... 8s. It can be influenced by setting the LO-Teach and the switch point:

• The lower the LO-Teach or the switch point is set, the faster the unit switches on.

• The higher the LO-Teach or switch point is set, the faster the unit switches off.

37

Bedienungsanleitung

Operating instructions

Notice utilisateurs

R

Elektronischer

Drucksensor

Electronic pressure sensor

Capteur de pression

électronique

PN70XX

Safety instructions

Read the product description before installing the unit. Ensure that the product is suitable for your application without any restrictions.

Non-adherence to the operating instructions or technical data can lead to personal injury and/or damage to property.

In all applications check compliance of the product materials

(see Technical data) with the media to be measured.

For gaseous media the application is limited to max. 25 bar.

Controls and indicating elements

1 2

3

Mode/Enter Set

4

5

1

2

3

3 (4) x LED green

2 x LED yellow

4-digit alphanumerical display

Set button 4

5

16

Mode / Enter button

Lighting LED = set display unit.

Switching status; lights if the respective output has switched.

Display of the system pressure, display of parameters and parameter values.

Setting of the parameter values

(scrolling by holding pressed; incremental by pressing briefly).

Selection of the parameters and acknowledgement of the parameter values.

Function and features

• The pressure sensor detects the system pressure,

• shows the current system pressure on its display,

• and generates 2 output signals according to the set output configuration.

Switching function

(output 1 and output 2; function can be selected for each output separately)

Diagnostic function

(only output 2) hysteresis function / N.O. (Hno) hysteresis function / N.C. (Hnc) window function / N.O. (Fno) window function / N.C. (Fnc)

OU2 = dESI; in case of a fault output 2 becomes inactive.

Applications (Type of pressure: relative pressure)

Order no.

Measuring range

Permissible overl. pressure

Bursting pressure

PN7000

PN7001

PN7002

PN7003

PN7004

PN7006

PN7007

PN7009

PN7060 bar

0...400

0...250

0...100

0...25

-1...+10

0...2.5

0...1

-1...+1

0...600

PSI

0...5 800

0...3 625

0...1 450

0...363

-14.5...145

0...36.3

0...14.5

-14.5...+14.5

0...8 700 bar

600

400

300

150

75

20

10

20

800

PSI

8 700

5 800

4 350

2 175

1 087

290

145

290

11 600 bar

1 000

850

650

350

150

50

30

50

1 200

MPa = bar ÷ 10 / kPa = bar × 100

Avoid static and dynamic overpressure exceeding the given overload pressure.

For gaseous media the application is limited to max. 25bar.

Even if the bursting pressure is exceeded only for a short time the unit can be destroyed (danger of injuries)!

PSI

14 500

12 300

9 400

5 075

2 175

725

450

725

17 400

High-pressure units (400 bar, 600 bar) are supplied with an integrated damping device to comply with the regulations for UL approval and to avoid any risk of injury in case of bursting when bursting pressure is exceeded.

17

When the damping device is removed

• the unit can no longer be used under UL conditions,

• the damping device can become unusable.

If you have any questions, please contact ifm electronic's sales specialists.

Operating modes

Run mode

Normal operating mode

At power on the unit is in the Run mode. It carries out its measurement and evaluation functions and provides output signals according to the set parameters.

The display shows the current system pressure. The yellow LEDs indicate the switching state of the outputs.

Display mode

Indication of parameters and the set parameter values

When the "Mode/Enter" button is pressed briefly, the unit passes to the Display mode which allows parameter values to be read. The internal sensing, processing and output functions of the unit continue as if in Run mode.

• The parameter names are scrolled with each pressing of the

"Mode/Enter" button.

• When the "Set" button is pressed briefly, the corresponding parameter value is displayed for 15 s. After another 15 s the unit returns to the Run mode.

Programming mode

Setting of the parameter values

While viewing a parameter value pressing the "Set" button for more than 5 s causes the unit to enter the programming mode. You can alter the parameter value by pressing the "Set" button and confirm the new value by pressing the "Mode/Enter" button. The internal sensing, processing and output functions of the unit continue as if in

Run mode with the original parameter values unless a new value is confirmed.

The unit returns to the Run mode when no button has been pressed for 15 s.

18

Installation

Before mounting and removing the sensor, make sure that no pressure is applied to the system.

Mount the pressure sensor on a G¼ process connection.

Electrical connection

The unit must be connected by a suitably qualified electrician.

The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical equipment must be observed.

Voltage supply to EN50178, SELV, PELV.

The device shall be supplied from an isolating source and protected by an overcurrent device such that the limited voltage circuit requirements in accordance with UL 508 are met.

Disconnect power before connecting the unit as follows:

2: OUT2

4: OUT1

2 x p-switching

1 BN

2 WH

4 BK

3 BU

L+

L

2: OUT2

4: OUT1

2 x n-switching

1 BN

2 WH

4 BK

3 BU

L+

L

Connector view (sensor)

2

3 1

4

Core colours of ifm sockets:

1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white),

3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black).

Pin 4 (OUT1) = switching output

Pin 2 (OUT2) = switching output if

OU2 = Hno, Hnc, Fno, Fnc

Pin 2 (OUT2) = diagnostic output if

OU2 = dESI

19

Programming

1

Mode/Enter Set

Press the Mode/Enter button several times until the respective

parameter is displayed.

Mode/Enter Set

Press the Set button and keep it pressed. The current parameter

value flashes for 5 s,

2

then the value is increased*

(incremental by pressing briefly or scrolling by holding pressed).

3

4

Mode/Enter Set

Change more parameters:

Start again with step 1.

Press the Mode/Enter button

briefly (= acknowledgement).

The parameter is displayed again, the set parameter value

becomes effective.

Finish programming:

Wait for 15 s or press the

Mode/Enter button until the current measured value is indicated again.

*Decrease the value: Let the display of the parameter value move to the maximum setting value. Then the cycle starts again at the minimum setting value.

Select the display unit (Uni) before setting values for the parameters SPx and rPx. This avoids rounding errors generated internally during the conversion of the units and enables exact setting of the values.

Setting at the factory: bAr.

If no button is pressed for 15 s during the setting procedure, the unit returns to the Run mode with unchanged values.

The unit can be electronically locked to prevent unwanted adjustment of the set parameters: Press both pushbuttons until

To unlock: Press both pushbuttons until is displayed.

is displayed. Units are delivered from the factory in the unlocked state.

With the unit in the locked state is indicated briefly when you try to change parameter values.

20

Installation and set-up / operation

After mounting, wiring and setting check whether the unit operates correctly.

Fault indication

Overload (above measuring range of the sensor).

Underload (below measuring range of the sensor).

Flashing: short circuit in the switching output 1*.

Flashing: short circuit in the switching output 2*.

Flashing: short circuit in both switching outputs*.

Flashing: internal fault

*The output concerned is switched off as long as the short circuit continues.

The faults SC1, SC2, SC, Err are indicated even if the display is deactivated.

Diagnostic function

(according to DESINA specification)

Output 2 is used as a diagnostic output if OU2 = dESI.

• If there is no fault, the output is switched and carries UB+ (if P-n =

PnP) or UB- (if P-n = nPn).

• In case of malfunctions the output becomes inactive. The following malfunctions are detected:

Measuring cell defect; short circuit in output 1; exceeding / not reaching the limits of the measuring range, EEPROM fault, RAM fault, processor fault.

21

Technical informations / Functioning / Parameters

Adjustable parameters

Switch-on point 1 / 2:

Upper limit value at which the output changes its switching status.

Setting range → page 38 / 39.

SP2 is active only if OU2 = Hno, Hnc, Fno or Fnc.

Switch-off point 1 / 2

Lower limit value at which the output changes its switching status.

rPx is always lower than SPx. The unit only accepts values which are lower than SPx.

Changing the switch-on point also changes the switch-off point

(the distance between SPx and rPx remains constant).

If the distance is higher than the new switch point, it is automatically reduced (rPx is set to the minimum setting value).

Setting range → page 38 / 39.

rP2 is active only if OU2 = Hno, Hnc, Fno or Fnc.

Configuration of output 1

4 switching functions can be set:

- Hno = hysteresis / normally open

- Hnc = hysteresis / normally closed

- Fno = window function / normally open

- Fnc = window function / normally closed

Configuration of output 2

4 switching functions and the diagnostic function can be set:

- Hno = hysteresis / normally open

- Hnc = hysteresis / normally closed

- Fno = window function / normally open

- Fnc = window function / normally closed

- dESI = Output 2 is used as a diagnostic output

Enhanced functions

This menu item contains a submenu with additional parameters.

You can access these parameters by pressing the SET button briefly.

If the submenu is protected with an access code,"Cod1" flashes in the display.

- Press the "Set" button and hold it pressed until the valid code no. is shown.

- Then briefly press the "Mode/Enter" button.

Delivery by ifm electronic: no access restriction.

22

Display unit

The measured value and the values for SPx, rPx can be displayed in the following units: bar / mbar, PSI, MPa / kPa, for PN7007 and PN7009 in addition inHg.

Select the display unit before setting the values for the parameters SPx, rPx. This avoids rounding errors generated internally during the conversion of the units and enables exact setting of the values.

Setting at the factory: Uni = bAr.

Min-Max memory for system pressure

• HI: displays the highest measured pressure

• LO: displays the lowest measured pressure (only PN7004 and

PN7009).

Erase the memory:

- Press the "Mode/Enter" button until HI or LO is displayed.

- Press the "Set" button and keep it pressed until “- - - -” is displayed.

- Then press the "Mode/Enter" button briefly.

Delay time for the switching outputs

dSx = switch-on delay; drx = switch-off delay.

The output does not immediately change its switching status when the switching condition is met but when the delay time has elapsed. If the switching condition is no longer met when the delay time has elapsed, the switching state of the output does not change.

• Setting range: 0 (= delay time not active) - 0.2 ... 50 s,

• in steps of 0.2 s.

dS2 / dr2 are not active if OU2 = dESI.

Output polarity

2 options can be selected:

- PnP = positive switching / - nPn = negative switching

This setting applies to both switching outputs.

Damping for the switching outputs

Pressure peaks of short duration or high frequency can be filtered out.

dAP-value = response time between pressure change and change of the switching status in ms.

• The value for dAP defines the switching frequency (f) of the output: dAP f [Hz]

3

170

6

80

10

50

17

30

30

16

60

8

125

4

250

2

500

1

23

Setting of the display

7 options can be selected: d1 = update of the measured value every 50 ms.

d2 = update of the measured value every 200 ms.

d3 = update of the measured value every 600 ms.

The update interval only refers to the display. It has no effect on the output.

rd1, rd2, rd3, = display as d1, d2, d3; but rotated 180°.

OFF = In the Run mode the display of the measured value is deactivated. If one of the buttons is pressed, the current measured value is displayed for 15 s. Another press of the

Mode/Enter button opens the Display mode.

The LEDs remain active even if the display is deactivated.

24

1

0

1

0

Hysteresis function (fig. 1):

The hysteresis keeps the switching state of the output stable if the system pressure varies about the preset value. With the system pressure rising, the output switches when the switch-on point has been reached (SPx). With the system pressure falling the output does not switch back until the switch-off point (rPx) has been reached.

The hysteresis can be adjusted: First the switch-on point is set, then the switch-off point with the requested distance.

Window function (fig. 2):

The window function enables the monitoring of a defined acceptable range.

When the system pressure varies between the switch-on point (SPx) and the switch-off point (rPx), the output is switched (window function / NO) or not switched (window function / NC).

The width of the window can be set by means of the difference between SPx and rPx. SPx = upper value, rPx = lower value.

1 2

P

P acceptable range

SP rP hysteresis

SP rP t

Hno

Hnc 1

0

1

0 t

Fno

Fnc

Technical data

Operating voltage [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ... 36 DC 1)

Current consumption [mA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 50

Current rating [mA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Reverse polarity and overload protected up to 40 V

Short-circuit protected; Watchdog

Voltage drop [V]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 2

Power-on delay time [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3

Switching frequency [Hz] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ... 1

Accuracy / deviations (in% of the span)

- Accuracy of switch point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < ± 0.5

- Characteristics deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < ± 0.5

- Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < ± 0.25 (0.5 for PN7060)

- Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < ± 0.1

- Long-time stability (in% of value of measuring range / 6 months). < ± 0.05

- Temperature coefficients (TEMPCO) in the compensated temperature range 0 ... +80°C (in% of the span/10K) greatest TEMPCO of the zero point / of the span . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 / 0.2

Materials (wetted parts) . . . . stainless steel (303S22); ceramics; FPM (Viton)

Housing material stainless steel (304S15); stainless steel (316S12);

PC(Macrolon); Pocan; PEI; EPDM/X (Santoprene); FPM (Viton)

Protection / Housing

Protection / Housing

2)

3) in addition PTFE (PN7003 ... PN7009)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 67 (IEC 60529) / (UL50)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 65 (IEC 60529) / (UL50)

Protective class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III (EN 50178)

Insulation resistance [M Ω] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . > 100 (500 V DC)

Shock resistance [g] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11ms)

Vibration resistance [g] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 10 - 2000 Hz)

Switching cycles min. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 million (50 million for PN7060)

Operating temperature [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 ... +80 (at UB < 32 V)

-20 ... +60 (at UB > 32 V)


Storage temperature [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 ... +100

EMC EN 61000-4-2 ESD: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 8 KV

EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 V/m

EN 61000-4-4 Burst: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 KV

EN 61000-4-5 Surge: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 / 1 KV

EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 V

1)

2)

3) to EN50178, SELV, PELV referring to UL; see also page 19 (Electrical connection) for PN7060, PN7000 ... PN7002 for PN7003 ... PN7009

25

Operating Instructions

RIA452

Process display

BA188R/09/a3/10.05

51009173

RIA452

Table of contents

1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

1.1 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation . . . . . . . 52

1.3 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

1.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

1.5 Notes on safety conventions and icons . . . . . . . . . . 53

2 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.1 Device designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.2 Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.3 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.1 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.2 Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4.1 Quick wiring guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4.2 Connecting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.3 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5.1 Quick operation guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5.2 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

5.3 Local operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

6 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

6.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

6.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

6.3 Device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

7 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

8 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

9 Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

9.1 Trouble-shooting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

9.2 Process error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

9.3 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

9.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

9.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Endress+Hauser

Table of contents

51

Safety instructions RIA452

1 Safety instructions

Safe operation of the process display unit is only guaranteed if these Operating Instructions have been read and the safety instructions have been observed.

1.1

Designated use

The RIA452 process display unit analyses analog process variables and depicts them on its multicoloured display. Processes can be monitored and controlled using analog and digital outputs and limit relays. RIA452 provides the user with a wide range of software functions for this purpose.

Power can be supplied to 2-wire sensors with the integrated transmitter power supply.

– The device is seen as accessory equipment and may not be installed in hazardous areas.

– The manufacturer does not accept liability for damage caused by improper or non-designated use.

The device may not be converted or modified in any way.

– The device is designed for installation in a panel and may only be operated in an installed state.

1.2

Installation, commissioning and operation

This device has been constructed to state-of-the-art technology and meets all applicable standards and EU directives. The device, however, can be a source of application-related danger if used improperly or other than intended.

Installation, wiring, commissioning and maintenance of the device must only be carried out by trained technical personnel. They must have read and understood these Operating Instructions and must follow the instructions they contain. The information in the electrical wiring diagrams (see

Section 4 'Wiring') must be observed closely.

1.3

Operational safety

Technical improvement

The manufacturer reserves the right to adapt technical details to the most up-to-date technical developments without any special announcement. Contact your local sales centre for information about the current state of and possible extensions to the Operating Instructions.

1.4

Return

For a return, e.g. in case of repair, the device must be sent in protective packaging. The original packaging offers the best protection. Repairs must only be carried out by your supplier's service orga-

!

nisation.

Note!

Please enclose a note describing the fault and the application when sending the unit in for repair.

52 Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Safety instructions

1.5

Notes on safety conventions and icons

The safety instructions in these Operating Instructions are labelled with the following safety icons

" and symbols:

Caution!

This symbol indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in

# incorrect operation or destruction of the device.

Warning!

This symbol indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in injury,

!

a safety hazard or the destruction of the device.

Note!

This symbol indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can have an indirect effect on operation or trigger an unexpected response on the part of the device.

Endress+Hauser 53

Identification

2 Identification

2.1

Device designation

2.1.1

Nameplate

Compare the nameplate on the device with the following diagram:

RIA452

54

Fig. 2:

1

2

3

4

5

Nameplate of the process display unit (example)

Order code and serial number of the device

Power supply

Software version number

Ambient temperature

Performance

2.2

Scope of delivery

The scope of delivery of the process display unit comprises:

• Process display unit for panel mounting

• Operating Instructions

• CD-ROM with PC configuration software and interface cable RS232 (optional)

• Fixing clips

!

• Sealing ring

Note!

Please note the device accessories in Section 8 'Accessories'.

2.3

Certificates and approvals

CE mark, declaration of conformity

The process display unit is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested and left the factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. The device meets the relevant standards and directives as per IEC 61 010-1 "Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use".

The device described in these Operating Instructions thus meets the legal requirements of the EU directives. The manufacturer confirms that the device has been tested successfully by affixing the

CE mark.

Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Installation

3 Installation

3.1

Installation conditions

The permitted ambient conditions (see Section 10 "Technical data") must be observed when installing and operating. The device must be protected against the effects of heat.

3.1.1

Dimensions

Observe the device face-to-face length of 150 mm (5.91"). Further dimensions are provided in

Section 10 "Technical data".

3.1.2

Mounting location

Installation in panel with 92x92 mm (3.62"x3.62") cutout (as per EN 60529). The mounting location must be free from vibrations.

3.1.3

Orientation

Horizontal +/- 45 in every direction.

3.2

Installation instructions

Endress+Hauser

Fig. 3: Panel cutout (data in mm, data in inches in brackets)

Provide a panel cutout of 92x92mm (3.62"x3.62"). The installation depth is 150mm (5.91").

1.

Push the device with the sealing ring through the panel cutout from the front.

2.

Keep the device horizontal and suspend the two fixing clips in the recesses provided.

3.

Tighten the screws of the fixing clips evenly with a screwdriver.

The dimensions of the process display unit are provided in Section 10 "Technical data".

55

Wiring

56

RIA452

4

4.1

Wiring

Quick wiring guide

Current input

81

82

11

12

20..36V DC

20...28V AC

50/60Hz

90...250V AC

50/60Hz

Relay 8

Relay 7

Relay 6

Relay 5

146

151

152

153

141

142

143

154

155

156

144

145

Relay output nc

53

41

42

43

46

51

52

54

55

56

44

45

J1

J2

Relay 4

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1

Relay 1-8

250V AC /30V DC

3 A

Analog output

0..20mA, 0..10V DC

Transmitter power supply unit

24V, <= 250mA

Internal circuits represented by dashed lines.

RS232

1

2

3

4

Digital inputs acc. to DIN 19240

Voltage level: -3...5 V low,

12...30 V high

Input current typ. 3 mA

(with overload and reverse polarity protection)

Input voltage max. 34.5 V

Sampling frequency max. 10 Hz

Digital output, passive open collector max. 24V, 200mA

Fig. 4: Terminal assignment of process display unit (Universal input see Page 58)

Terminal assignment

J2

11

Terminal Terminal assignment

L/L+

N/L-

L for AC

L+ for DC

N for AC

L- for DC

NC

J1

Not connected

Type

Power supply

Jumper for locking device operation via hardware.

If the jumper is set to J1, the configuration cannot be modified.

!

Note!

The device can always be configured with

Readwin ® 2000 via RS232, even if the jumper is attached to J1.

Not connected

+ 0/4 to 20mA signal

Endress+Hauser

RIA452

152

153

144

145

146

154

155

156

54

55

56

141

142

143

151

53

44

45

46

43

51

52


12

81

82

41

42

Signal ground (current)

24 V, sensor power supply 1

Ground, sensor power supply 1

Normally closed (NC)

Common (COM)

Normally open (NO)


Common (COM)

Normally open (NO)


Common (COM)

Normally open (NO)


Common (COM)

Normally open (NO)


Common (COM)

Normally open (NO)


Common (COM)

Normally open (NO)


Common (COM)

Normally open (NO)


Common (COM)

Normally open (NO)

Relay 3

Relay 4

Relay 5 (optional)

Relay 6 (optional)

Relay 7 (optional)

Relay 8 (optional)

Wiring

Type

Transmitter power supply (optionally intrinsically safe)

Relay 1

Relay 2

Endress+Hauser 57

Wiring

34

91

92

Terminal

96

Terminal assignment

Ground for digital status inputs

97

197

297

397

31

32

33

+ digital status input 1




+ analog output

Ground, analog output

+ digital output

Ground, digital output

24 V, sensor power supply 2

Ground, sensor power supply 2

Type

Digital inputs

Analog output (optional)

Digital output (optional)

Transmitter power supply

Universal input option

The device can be optionally equipped with a universal input instead of a current input.

RIA452

58

Fig. 5: Universal input terminal assignment

Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Wiring

Terminal assignment


13

15

17

19

11

12

+ 0/4 to 20 mA signal

Signal ground (current, voltage, temperature)

± 1 V, + thermocouples, - resistance thermometer signal (3-wire/4-wire)

+ resistance thermometer signal (4-wire)

± 30 V

+ resistance thermometer power supply (3-wire/4-wire)

4.2

Connecting the device

"

Caution!

Do not install or wire the device when it is connected to the power supply. Failure to comply with this precaution can result in irreparable damage to the electronics.

"

4.2.1

Caution!

Connecting the power supply

• Before wiring the device, ensure that the supply voltage corresponds to the specification on the nameplate.

• For the 90 to 250 V AC version (mains connection), a switch marked as a separator, as well as an overvoltage organ (rated current d 10 A), must be fitted in the supply line near the device (easy to reach).

Fig. 6: Connecting the power supply

!

4.2.2

Note!

Connecting external sensors

Active and passive sensors with analog, TC, resistance and RTD sensors can be attached to the device.

Depending on the type of signal of the sensor in question, the terminals can be freely selected which means the process display unit can be used with great flexibility.

Endress+Hauser 59

Wiring

Current input 0/4...20 mA active sensor passive sensor

81 81

82 82

Fig. 7:

Y

-

11

12

11

Y

-

Terminals 12 and 82 internally bridged

12

Connecting a 2-wire sensor to current input 0/4...20 mA

Universal input

RIA452

60

Fig. 8: Connecting a sensor to universal input

4.3

Post-connection check

Device condition and specifications

Is the device or cable damaged (visual inspection)?

Electrical connection

Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?

-

Notes

Notes

90 to 250 V AC (50/60 Hz)

20 to 36 V DC

20 to 28 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Are all of the terminals firmly engaged in their correct slots? Is the coding on the individual terminals correct?

Are the mounted cables strain relieved?

Are the power supply and signal cables correctly connected?

-

-

Are all screw terminals firmly tightened?

-

See wiring diagram on the housing

Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Operation

5 Operation

5.1

Quick operation guide

M1

M2

M3

Analog input

INPUT

Display

DISPLAY

Analog output

ANALOG

OUT

M5

Digital input 1-4

DIGITAL INP.

Signal type

Signal type

0% value

0% value

Connection type*

Connection

00% value

100% value

Assign numerical display

Ref. num.

Assign bargraph

Ref. bargraph

Curve

Curve

Offset

Offset

Assignment

Ref. num.

Offset

Offset

Function, digital input 1-4

Function

Damping

Out damp

Output in the event of a fault

Fail mode

Active level

1-4

Level

Decimal point bargraph

Dec. point

Output range

Out range

Value in the event of a fault

Fail value

Pump monitoring sampling time

Sampl. time

-

M10

M17

Limit

1-4 (8)

LIMIT

M18

Integration

INTEGRATION

Assignment

Ref. num

Alternate function

1-4 (8)

Alternate

Function

1-4 (8)

Function

Recurrent operation

24 h

Signal source for integration

Ref. Integr.

Integration base

Integr. base

Decimal point

Dec. point

Runtime display 1-8

Runtime

Decimal point factor

Dec. factor

Signal damping

1st order low pass

Damp

Comparative temperature*

Comp. temp

Dimension

Dimension

Fixed comparative temperature *

Const. temp

Decimal point

Dec. point

Cable open circuit detection

Open circ.

* = Only available if the associated option is installed in the device

0% value

Bar 0%

100% value

Bar 100%

Orientation

Bar rise

Decimal point

Dec. point

Simulation mA

Simu mA

0% value

Out 0%

Simulation Volt

Simu V

Switch point A

Setpoint A

Switching freq. display 1-8

Count

Factor

Factor

Switch point B

Setpoint B

Reset switching freq. and runtime

Reset

Dimension totalizer

Dimension

M19

Pulse output

PULSE OUT

M20

Min/Max memory

MIN/MAX

Decimal point pulse value

Dec value

Signal source for

Min/Max

Ref. Min/Max

Pulse value

Unit Value

Decimal point

Dec. point

Pulse width

Pulse width

Display minimum value

Min. value

Pulse output simulation

Sim pulseout

Display maximum value

Max. value

Reset minimum value

Reset min

M21

Linearisation table

LIN-TABLE

-

M23

Mxx

Lin. support points

NO 01 NO 32

Number of support points

Counts

X-axis

X value

M55

Operating parameters

PARAMETERS

User code

User code

Failsafe mode at

4-20 mA input

Namur

M56

SERVICE

M57

M58

EXIT

SAVE

Dimension linearised value

Dimension

Y-axis

Y value

Program name

Progname

Error limit 1

Range 1

Decimal point

Y-axis

Dec. Y value

Program version

Version

Error limit 2

Range 2

Delete all support points

Del points

Pump rotation function

Func. alt.

Error limit 3

Range 3

Show all support points

Show points

Relay lock time

Lock time

Error limit 4

Range 4

- For service personnel only. The service code must be entered.

- Exit the menu. If parameters have been changed, a query is issued whether the changes are to be saved.

- Changes are saved and the menu is exited.

Fig. 9: Operating matrix

100% value

Out 100%

Hysteresis or switchback gradient

Hysteresis

Relay simulation

Simu Relay

Switching delay

1-4 (8) in seconds

Delay

Decimal point totalizer

Dec. total

Reset totalizer

Totalizer

Reset maximum value

Reset max

Relay failsafe mode

Rel. Mode

Display contrast

Contrast

Time for gradient evaluation

Grad. Time

Endress+Hauser 61

Operation

5.2

Display and operating elements

RIA452

62

Fig. 10: Display and operating elements

4)

5)

6)

7)

1)

2)

3)

8)

9)

Green operating indicator, lights up when supply voltage is applied

Red fault indicator, flashes in event of sensor or device error

Limit value display: If power is supplied to a relay, the symbol is displayed.

Digital input status: green indicates ready for operation, yellow indicates a signal is present

Bargraph yellow, 42-section with orange/red range overshoot and undershoot

7-digit 14-segment display in white for measured values

9x77 DOT matrix in white for text or units

Key or lock symbol indicates whether device operation is locked (see Section 5.3.3)

Jog/shuttle dial for local device operation

5.2.1

Display

Range

Input current is < lower error limit

Input current above lower error limit and below lower limitations of validity

Input current in valid range

Display "

Display

"

Display " "

Display scaled measured value

Input current below upper error limit and above upper limitations of validity

Input current above upper error limit

Display "

Display "

"

"

Relay

Fault condition

Analog output

Set failsafe mode

Integration

No integration

Normal limit value behaviour Normal behaviour with max.

10% overrange. No output

< 0 mA/0 V possible



< 0 mA/0 V possible



< 0 mA possible.

Fault condition Set failsafe mode

Normal behaviour (negative integration not possible)



No integration

Relay display

No power to relay: no display

Power to relay: (symbol displayed (yellow))

Digital input status display

Digital input configured: (green)

!

Signal at digital input:

Note!

(yellow)

Information on trouble-shooting can be found in Sections 9.1 and 9.2 of these Operating

Instructions.

Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Operation

5.3

Local operation

You can enter the menu by pressing the jog/shuttle dial for > 3 s.

5.3.1

Operation using the jog/shuttle dial

A) E+H 3-key functions

• Press = "Enter"

• Turning clockwise = "+"

• Turning counterclockwise = "-"

Fig. 11: Operation using jog/shuttle dial

B) List selection

Fig. 12: List selection with jog/shuttle dial

Æ Downward arrow:

Selection is at top of the list. Further entries are displayed when the jog/ shuttle dial is turned to the right.

Å

Æ

Both arrows visible:

User is in the middle of the selection list.

Å

Upward arrow:

End of selection list is reached. User moves towards top of the list by turning jog/shuttle dial to the left.

5.3.2

Entering text

Endress+Hauser

Fig. 13: Entering text with RIA452

63

Operation RIA452

3

4

1

2

Item

No.

5

Description

Start entering text by pushing the jog/shuttle dial for > 3 s. The first character starts flashing.

Turn the jog/shuttle dial to change the flashing (selected) character (see "Possible characters").

Press the jog/shuttle dial to select the next character (in our example, the second character is now flashing).

If the jog/shuttle dial is pressed briefly for the last character, the information entered is accepted.

If the jog/shuttle dial is pressed longer than 1 second (max. 2 seconds), the data input is rejected.

Possible characters

The following characters can be entered: space +ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789/\% 23 +-

.,:*()

5.3.3

Disabling the programming mode

The entire configuration can be protected against unintentional access by means of a four-digit code.

This code is assigned in the submenu "Parameter/User Code". All the parameters remain visible. If the value of a parameter should be changed, you are first asked for the user code.

In addition, configuration can also be locked using a switch on the rear of RIA452 (see Section 4.1).

This is indicated with a corresponding symbol on the display.

The "key" symbol is displayed if configuration is locked using the user code.

The "lock" symbol is displayed if hardware locking is activated.

64 Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Commissioning

6 Commissioning

6.1

Function check

Make sure that all post-connection checks have been carried out before you commission your device:

• See Section 3.3 'Post-installation check'

• Checklist Section 4.3 'Post-connection check'

6.2

Switching on the measuring device

Once the operating voltage is applied, the green LED (= device operating) lights up if no fault is present.

• When the device is first commissioned, it is in the status when delivered and uses the default settings for all parameters.

• When commissioning a device already configured or preset, measuring is immediately started as per the settings. The limit values only switch once the first measured value has been determined.

Function (menu item)

Signal type

6.3

Device configuration

This section describes all the configurable device parameters with the associated value ranges and factory settings (default values).

6.3.1

Analog input - INPUT/M1

All the parameters available for the input can be found under the analog input menu item which is marked as INPUT in the device.

Parameter setting

Off

4 - 20 mA

0 - 20 mA

0 - 5 mA *

0 - 100 mV *

0 - 200 mV *

0 - 1 V *

0 - 10 V *

± 150 mV *

± 1 V *

± 10 V *

± 30 V *

Type B (IEC584) *

Type J (IEC584) *

Type K (IEC584) *

Type L (DIN43710) *

Type L (GOST) *

Type N (IEC584) *

Type R (IEC584) *

Type S (IEC584) *

Type T (IEC584) *

Type U (DIN43710) *

Type D (ASTME998) *

Type C (ASTME998)

*

Description

Selects the signal type of the connected sensor. Parameters marked * can only be selected with the universal input option.

Endress+Hauser 65

Commissioning RIA452


Connection

Curve

3 Wire

4 Wire

Linear

Quad.

°C

°F

Kelvin

0..99.9

Parameter setting

PT50 (GOST) *

PT100 (IEC751) *

PT100 (JIS1604) *

PT100 (GOST) *

PT500 (IEC751) *

PT500 (JIS1604) *

PT500 (GOST) *

PT1000 (IEC751) *

PT1000 (JIS1604) *

PT1000 (GOST) *

Cu50 (GOST) *

Cu100 (GOST) *

30 - 3000 Ohm *

Damp

Dimension

Dec. point

0% value

100% value

Offset

XXXXXXXXX

XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

-99999..99999

-99999..99999

-99999..99999

Comp. temp

Const. temp

Open circ.

Intern const

9999.9

No

Yes

Description

Selects the signal type of the connected sensor. Parameters marked * can only be selected with the universal input option.

Configures the sensor connection in 3-wire or 4-wire technology. Can only be selected for "Signal type" 3000 :, PT50/100/1000, Cu50/100

Linear or square (quad.) curve of the sensor used; can be selected for analog signals. °C, °F, Kelvin physical measured variable, can be selected for temperature sensors.

Signal damping of measuring input with 1st order low pass. Time constant can be selected from 0 to 99.9 sec.

The technical unit or an arbitrary text for the measured value of the sensor can be configured here. Max. length 9 characters.

Number of places after the decimal point for displaying the measured value.

Start value of measured value, can be selected for analog signal types

End value of measured value, can be selected for analog signal types

Shifts the zero point of the response curve. This function is used to adjust the sensor.

Comparative temperature for thermocouple measurement. An internal cold junction (= Intern) or a constant value (= const) can be selected.

Fixed comparative temperature.

This can only be selected if const is set for "Cmp. Temp".

Cable open circuit detection

Adjusting the analog input

The input can be adjusted to the sensor with the aid of the following parameters.

For non-temperature sensors, a scaled value is calculated from the sensor signal:

For temperature outputs, the scaled value is calculated from linearisation tables. The temperature value can be converted to degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit or Kelvin. In addition, the temperature value can be corrected by means of an offset.

66 Endress+Hauser



Ref. num.

Ref. bargraf

Dec. point

Bar 0%

Bar 100%

Bar rise

6.3.2

Display - DISPLAY/M2

All the settings for the device display are grouped under this menu item.

Parameter setting

Input

Lintab

Total

Description

Selects which value is shown on the display.

• Input = measured value

• Lintab = linearised measured value

• Total = integrated value (can only be selected if the pulse output option is available)

Selects the signal source for the bargraph Input

Lintab

XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

-99999..99999

-99999..99999

Right

Left

Number of places after the decimal point for bargraph scaling.

Start value for the bargraph

End value for the bargraph

Bargraph orientation.

• Right = 100% value (rising from left to right)

• Left = 100% value left (falling from left to right)


Ref. num.

Out damp

Out range

Dec. point

Out 0%

Out 100%

Offset

6.3.3

Analog output - ANALOG OUT/M3

All the parameters available for the output can be found under the analog output menu item which is marked as ANALOG OUT in the device.

Parameter setting

Input

Lintab

0..99.9

Description

Selects which value is output at the analog output.



Signal damping of measuring input with 1st order low pass. Time constant can be selected from 0 to 99.9 sec.

Signal type of output

!

Note!

"Off" switches the output signal off completely.

Off

0 - 20 mA

4 - 20 mA

0 - 10 V

2 - 10 V

0-1 V

XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

-99999..99999

-99999..99999

-999.99..999.99

Number of places after the decimal point for outputting the measured value. Can be selected for analog signal types

Start value of the output signal

End value of the output signal

Shifts the zero point of the output curve in mA or V.

Endress+Hauser 67



Fail mode

Fail value

Hold const

Min

Max

Parameter setting

0..999.99

Description

Output value if a sensor or device error occurs.

• Hold = last valid value

• Const = freely selectable value

• Min = output value is 3.5 mA for 4-20 mA, and 0 V or 0 mA otherwise

• Max = output value is 22.0 mA for 0/4-20 mA, and 1.1 V or 11 V otherwise

The freely selectable value for "Fail mode = Const" can be set here.

Current output: 0...22 mA

Voltage output: 0...11 V

Outputs the selected current at the output regardless of the input value.

Is automatically set to OFF when exited.

Simu mA

Simu V

OFF

0.0 mA

3.6 mA

4 mA

10 mA

12 mA

20 mA

21 mA

OFF

0.0 V

5.0 V

10.0 V

Outputs the selected voltage at the output, regardless of the input value.



Function

Level

Sampl. time

6.3.4

Digital input - DIGITAL INP./M5

The settings for the digital status inputs, e.g. for monitoring pumps, starting/stopping the counter or resetting the min/max-value memory are grouped in this section.

Note: The digital status inputs are permanently assigned to the relays in the PUMP function. Relay 1 is monitored by digital input 1, relay 2 by digital input 2 etc.

Parameter setting

OFF

Pump

Res. Tot.

Start/Stop

Min/Max

Low

High

0..99

Description

Function of the selected digital input.

• OFF

• Pump = pump monitoring (see Pump monitoring function)

• Res. Tot. = reset the totalizer*

• Start/Stop = start or stop the totalizer*

• Min/Max = reset the min/max memory values

!

Note!

Parameters marked * are only available with the pulse output option.

Selects the side for evaluation.

• Low = descending side

• High = increasing side

Defines the time within which pump feedback at the digital input is to be expected. If there is no feedback within the defined time, an error message is generated and a second pump is activated if more than one pump is available.

68 Endress+Hauser


Pump monitoring function

The digital inputs 1-4 are permanently assigned to each relay 1-4. If the function of the digital input is set to pump monitoring, the sampling time starts when the relay is switched on. When the sampling time expires, the digital input is sampled continuously. If the signal is not active, the relay is switched off immediately and a fault message is generated (see ). If the alternate function for this relay is activated, a relay with an alternate function is also searched for and switched on.

Level

Threshold

Max + hysteresis

Threshold max

Relay

Digital input

Sampling time t

Quiescent state

Fault state

Active

Inactive

Pump feedback

OK

Relay remains energised

Fig. 14: Pump monitoring, pump OK

Endress+Hauser

Fig. 15: Pump monitoring, pump fault

The following parameters must be configured:

Menu

DIGITAL INP./M5


Function

Level

Sampl. time

Setting value

Pump

Low or High

Sampling time in seconds

69



Ref. num.

Function

Dec. point

Setpoint A

Setpoint B

Hysteresis

Delay

Alternate

24h

Runtime

Count

Reset

Simu relay

6.3.5

Limit values - LIMIT 1...8/M10...17

Parameter setting

Input

Lintab

Min

Max

Grad

In band

Out band

Alarm

Description

Selects which value is used:

• Input: scaled value from analog input

• Lintab: value from linearisation table

Selects limit value and fault monitoring. The relays are currentless in the event of device errors or incorrect input values (see error limits range 1...4 in

Section 1.3.11).

• Min: minimum with hysteresis (see Fig. 16)

• Max: maximum with hysteresis (see Fig. 17)

• Grad: gradient (see Fig. 18)

• In band: validity range within two values

• Out band: validity range outside of two values

• Alarm: relay is used as an alarm relay

Number of digits after the decimal point for the limit value.

XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

-99999...99999

-99999...99999

-99999...99999

0...99

No

Yes

0...60

Measured value at which a change in the switch status occurs (slope for gradient).

Default: 0.0

The second setpoint can be configured for the "In band" and "Out band" operating modes.

For entering the hysteresis for the threshold at minimum/maximum.

Sets the limit value event delay once the threshold is reached (in seconds)

(see Fig. 19).

Determines the switching function for this relay:

• No: none; switch point permanently assigned to relay

• Yes: alternate function (see Fig. 20)

Limit value is activated cyclically every 24 hours for 0...60 min.

Displays the run time of the connected device, e.g. pump, in hours [h].

Records the switching frequency of the limit value.

Resets the run time and switching frequency for this limit value.

No

Yes

Off

Low

High

Simulation of the selected limit value. Is automatically set to OFF when exited.

70 Endress+Hauser


Min operating mode

Measured value

Threshold

+ hysteresis

Threshold

Min

Hysteresis t

Relay at quiescent state

Relay at fault state

Fig. 16: Min operating mode


Menu

LIMIT 1...8/M10...17


Function

Setpoint A

Hysteresis

Max operating mode

Measured value

Threshold

Max

Threshold

- hysteresis

Setting value

Min

Value for threshold

Value for hysteresis

Hysteresis t



Fig. 17: Max operating mode


Menu

LIMIT 1...8/M10...17


Function

Setpoint A

Hysteresis

Setting value

Max

Value for threshold


Endress+Hauser 71


Grad operating mode

Measured value

M

0

M

0-m

T m

T

0

M

1-m

M

1

T m

T

1 evaluation t



Fig. 18: Grad operating mode

The "Grad" operating mode is used for monitoring the changes in the input signal over time. The time basis t m

of the monitoring system is configured in the "PARAMETER/M55 -> Grad. time" menu.

The difference between the lower range value M

0-m

and the upper range value M

0

of the interval is calculated. If the calculated value is greater that the value set under "Setpoint A", the relay is switched currentless.

The relay is switched on again once the difference between M

1-m

and M

1

drops below the value set in "Hysteresis". The sign determines the direction of signal change. A new value is calculated every

1.0 s (floating interval).


Menu Function (menu item) Setting value

LIMIT 1...8/M10...17

Function

Setpoint A

Hysteresis

Grad

Gradient value for threshold


Delay

Measured value

Threshold

Max

Threshold

- hysteresis

Delay

Hysteresis t



Fig. 19: Delay

72 Endress+Hauser



Menu Function (menu item)

LIMIT 1...8/M10...17

Setpoint A

Hysteresis

Delay

Setting value

Value for threshold


Delay time in [s]

Alternate

Measured value

Setpoint A 3

Setpoint A 3

- Hysterese 3

Setpoint A 2

Setpoint A 2

- Hysterese 2

Setpoint A 1

Setpoint A 1

- Hysterese 1

Mode Max t

With alternating pump control

Switching status

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1 t

Without alternating pump control

Switching status

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1 t

Relay currentless

Fig. 20: Alternating pump control

Alternate switching is used to ensure that several pumps are utilised evenly in level control systems.

The main factor for switching on a certain pump is not a fixed assigned switch-on value but rather

!

the question as to which pump was out of operation the longest.

Note!

Relays not included in alternating pump control are available.

This function cannot be applied to individual relays. Relays not included are not assessed based on the switch-on and switch-off duration.

The following parameters must be configured for the example above:

Menu Function (menu item) Setting value

LIMIT 1...3/M10...12

Each: Setpoint A

Each: hysteresis

Each: alternate

Value for threshold


Yes

Endress+Hauser 73



Ref. integr.

Integr. base

Dec. factor

Factor

Dimension

Dec. total

Totalizer

Reset Total

6.3.6

INTEGRATION/M18

This function can only be selected if the pulse output option is available in the device.

Parameter setting

Input

Lintab

Description

Selects which value should be integrated.



Time basis for integration OFF sec

Min hour day

XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

0 ..99999

XXXXXXXXX

Decimal point position of the conversion factor

Conversion factor


Decimal point of totalizer XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

9999999

No

Yes

Assign totalizer a default value.

Reset totalizer

!

Note!

Cannot be configured with ReadWin ® 2000.

Integration function

With this function, the computed value from the linearisation table or that of the analog input can be numerically integrated to create a totalizer for example.

The totalizer is calculated as follows:


Dec. value

The measuring interval is 0.1 s.

6.3.7

Pulse output - PULSE OUT/M19

All the possible settings for the pulse output can be found in this menu item. This menu item can only be selected if your device is fitted with this option.

Parameter setting

XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

Description

Decimal point position of the pulse value.

74 Endress+Hauser



Unit value

Pulse width

Parameter setting

0 ..99999

0.04 .. 2000ms

Description

Pulse value with which the pulses at the output should be output.

Sets the pulse width at the pulse output.

!

Note!

The maximum output frequency depends on the pulse width: f(max) = 1 / (2*pulse width)

Outputs the selected pulses at the pulse output regardless of the input value.


Sim pulseout OFF

1 Hz

10 Hz

100 Hz

1000 Hz

10000 Hz


Ref. min/max

Dec. point

Min. value

Max. value

Reset min

Reset max

No

Yes

No

Yes

XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

0..99999

0..99999

6.3.8

Min/Max memory - MIN MAX/M20

The RIA452 can save a minimum and a maximum measured value. The input signal or the signal processed using the linearisation table are available as the signal source. The memory is reset manually or using the digital input (see Section 6.3.4).

Parameter setting

Input

Lintab

Description

Signal source for the min/max value memory.

• Input = input signal

• Lintab = linearised input signal

Number of digits after the decimal point for the min/max value memory.

Displays the current minimum value in the memory.

Displays the current maximum value in the memory.

Resets the minimum value memory.

Resets the maximum value memory.

Endress+Hauser 75



Counts

Dimension

Dec. Y value

Del. points

Show points

6.3.9

Linearisation table - LIN. TABLE/M21

The RIA452 can store a table which can be used to linearise the input signal. This table can convert a level signal to the associated volume for example.

Parameter setting

2..32

XXXXXXXXX

Description

Number of support points needed. At least two points have to be entered.


Decimal point position for the Y-values in the linearisation table.

No

Yes

No

Yes

XXXXXXX

XXXXXX.X

XXXXX.XX

XXXX.XXX

XXX.XXXX

Delete all programmed support points.

Show all programmed support cells.


X value

Y value

6.3.10

Support points of linearisation table - LINPOINTS 1..X/

M23..MXX

Displays the set value pairs of the linearisation table. This menu item is only visible if a linearisation table was configured under Section 6.3.9 and "Yes" was selected in the "Show points" parameter in the "LIN. TABLE/M21" menu.

Parameter setting

-99999..99999

-99999..99999

Description

X-value of the linearisation table. Corresponds to the input value.

Y-value that belongs to the previous X-value. Corresponds to the converted measured value.

76 Endress+Hauser



User code

Progname

Version

Func. alt.

Lock time

Rel. Mode

Grad. Time

Namur

Range 1

Range 2

Range 3

Range 4

Contrast

6.3.11

Operating parameter - PARAMETER/M55

This menu item contains configuration options such as the user code, failsafe mode of RIA452 to

NAMUR etc.

Parameter setting

0..99999

ILU00xA

V X.XX.XX

Time

Count

99.9

OFF

ON

1..100

No

Yes

3.6 (0.0...22.0)

3.8 (0.0...22.0)

20.5 (0.0...22.0)

21.0 (0.0...22.0)

0...99

Description

Freely selectable user code. Once this code has been entered, configuration can only be enabled again by reentering this code.

This is indicated on the display with the "key" figure once the code has been saved.

Displays the name of the device software currently installed in the display unit.

Version of the software currently installed in the device.

Setting for controlling pump rotation in alternating pump control.

• Time = switching time of the relay

• Count = switching frequency of the relay

Locking time of the relay, 0...99.9 s

Failsafe mode of the relays.

• OFF = relays de-energise in the event of an error or device malfunction

• ON = relays energise in the event of an error or device malfunction

Time setting for gradient evaluation, 1...100 s

Sensor evaluation to NAMUR (e.g. cable open circuit).

Only for 4...20 mA current signal.

Error limits for the input signal.

In the "NAMUR=Yes" operating mode, ranges 1...4 are assigned the limits specified by Namur NE 43 and cannot be changed.

In the "NAMUR=No" operating mode, the error limits can be freely selected.

Here, please note that the following applies: Range 1 < Range 2 < Range 3 <

Range 4.

Violation of these limits can be evaluated with a relay for example ("Alarm" operating mode).

Setting for the display contrast.

• 0 = low contrast

• 99 = high contrast

Endress+Hauser 77

Maintenance RIA452

7 Maintenance

No special maintenance work is required on the device.

8 Accessories

Name Order No.

ReadWin ® 2000 PC configuration software and serial cable with jack connector 3.5 mm for RS232 port.

ReadWin ® 2000 PC configuration software and serial cable for USB port with

TDL connecter.

RIA452A-VK

TXU10A-xx

IP65 Field housing.

51009957

9 Trouble-shooting

The following section provides you with an overview of possible causes of errors to provide you with an initial trouble-shooting aid.

9.1

Trouble-shooting instructions

#

Warning!

In the case of Ex devices, fault diagnosis cannot be carried out on the open device as this annuls the explosion protection.

Display

No measured value display

Cause

No power supply connected

Remedy

Check the power supply of the device.

Power supply applied, device defective The device must be replaced.

The red marking for overrange/underrange is flashing on the bargraph.

Analog output is > 10% above or below the scaled range.

Check the scaling of the analog output

(Out 100% or Out 0%).

!

Note!

Errors for which an error code is shown on the display are described in Section 9.2.

Further information on the display is also provided in Section 5.2.1.

78 Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Trouble-shooting

9.2

Process error messages

!

Note!

Faults have the highest priority. The associated error code is displayed. A fault is present if the memory module for writing and reading data is defective or if data could not be read correctly.

9.2.1

Device malfunction

Error code Cause

E 101 Bus error reading the config/ calibration data after power-up

E 102

E 103

Implausible operating data

(checksum)

Implausible calibration data

Effect

Faulty device functioning

Configuration lost

Faulty device functioning

E 104

E 105

E 106

E 210

E 221

E 222

E 290

Remedy

Instrument error, notify Service

Perform preset

Instrument error, notify Service

Reset min/max values Bus error reading the min/max data after power-up

Incorrect min/max values

Bus error reading the relay data after power-up

Incorrect relay data

Universal card bus error

Pulse output, pulse buffer overflow

Faulty universal input functioning

A maximum of 10 pulses are buffered

Reset relay data

Replace universal card, notify

Service

Set the parameters of the pulse output in such a way that the maximum frequency is not exceeded

Pump error, digital input 1



Relay goes to failsafe mode

Acknowledge error via operation or switching power on/off


Number overshoot due to decimal point shift

Decimal point position cannot be altered

Check decimal point position and number range

9.2.2

Incorrect entries

Error code

E 290

Description Reaction at device

The number of digits after the decimal point cannot be increased due to number overflow of the dependent parameters.

Error code is shown on the display until a key is pressed.

Endress+Hauser 79

Trouble-shooting

9.3

Spare parts

RIA452

80

Fig. 21: RIA452 spare parts

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

No Item

No.

4

5

6

2

3

Item No.

Name

1 Housing front

Housing seal

Ex-cover (rear panel)

Rotary button with seal

Relay board

Mainboard 90...250 V, 50/60 Hz

Mainboard 20...36 V DC; 20...28 V AC, 50/60 Hz

7 Standard input card

Standard input card ATEX, FM, CSA approval

Multi-function input card

Complete display board

LC display (glass with background illumination)

Terminal (mains) 3-pin

Terminal (relay 1-8) 6-pin

Terminal (analog input) 4-pin

Terminal (analog output, Open Collector, transmitter power supply) 6-pin

Terminal (digital inputs) 5-pin

Jumper operating lock

Casing fixing clip RIA452 (1 piece)

51008588

51008587

50033350

50084623

Order No.

RIA452X-HA

50070730

51008272

RIA452X-HB

RIA452X-RA

RIA452X-MA

RIA452X-MB

RIA452X-IA

RIA452X-IB

RIA452X-IC

RIA452X-DA

RIA452X-DB

50078843

51005104

51009302

Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Trouble-shooting

9.4

Return

To reuse later or in case of repair, the device must be sent in protective packaging, preferably the original packaging. Repairs must only be carried out by your supplier's service organisation or specially trained personnel. Enclose a note describing the fault when sending the unit in for repair.

9.5

Disposal

The device contains electronic components and must, therefore, be disposed of as electronic waste in the event of disposal. Please observe in particular the local waste disposal regulations of your country.

Endress+Hauser 81

Technical data

Measured variable

Measuring ranges

Galvanic isolation

Output signal

Signal on alarm

Current/voltage output

RIA452

10 Technical data

10.0.1

Input

Current (standard)

Digital inputs (standard)

Current/voltage, resistance, resistance thermometer, thermocouples (universal input option)

Current input:

• 0/4...20 mA +10% overrange, 0...5 mA

• Short-circuit current: max. 150 mA

• Input impedance: d 5 :

• Reaction time: d 100 ms

Universal input:

Current:

• 0/4...20 mA +10% overrange, 0...5 mA

• Short-circuit current: max. 100 mA

• Input impedance: d 50 :

Voltage:

• ±150 mV, ±1 V, ±10 V, ±30 V, 0...100 mV, 0...200 mV, 0...1 V, 0...10 V

• Input impedance: t 100 k:

Resistance:

• 30...3,000 : in 3-wire/4-wire technology

Resistance thermometer:

• Pt100/Pt100/500/1000, Cu50/100, Pt50 in 3-wire/4-wire technology

• Measuring current for Pt100/500/1000 = 250 PA

Thermocouple types:

• J, K, T, N, B, S, R as per IEC584

• D, C as per ASTME998

• U, L as per DIN43710/GOST

• Reaction time: d 100 ms

Digital input:

• Voltage level -3...5 V low, 12...30 V high (as per DIN19240)

• Input voltage max. 34.5 V

• Input current typ. 3 mA with overload and reverse polarity protection

• Sampling frequency max. 10 Hz

Towards all other circuits

10.0.2

Output

Relay, transmitter power supply (standard)

Current, voltage, pulse, intrinsically safe transmitter power supply (option)

No measured value visible on the LC display, no background illumination, no sensor power supply, no output signals, relays behave in fail safe manner.

Span:

• 0/4...20 mA (active), 0...10 V (active)

Load:

• d 600 : (current output)

• Max. loop current 22 mA (voltage output)

82 Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Technical data

Pulse output

Signal characterisation:

• Signal freely scalable

Galvanic isolation towards all other circuits

• Frequency range up to 12.5 kHz

• I max

= 200 mA

• U max

= 28 V

• U low/max

= 2 V at 200 mA

• Pulse width = 0.04 up to 2000 ms

• Load min. 1 k :

Relay Signal characterisation:

• Binary, switches when the limit value is reached

Switch function: limit relay switches for the operating modes:

• Minimum/maximum safety

• Alternating pump control function

• Batch function

• Time control

• Window function

• Gradient

• Device malfunction

• Sensor malfunction

Switching threshold:

• Freely programmable

Hysteresis:

• 0 to 99%

Signal source:

• Analog input signal

• Integrated value

• Digital input

Number:

• 4 in basic unit (can be extended to 8 relays, option)

Electrical specifications:

• Relay type: changeover

• Relay switching capacity: 250 V AC / 30 V DC, 3 A

• Switch cycles: typically 10 5

• Switching frequency: max. 5 Hz

!

Galvanic isolation towards all other circuits

Note! Assignment

Mixed assignment of low and extra-low voltage circuits is not permitted for neighbouring relays.

Transmitter power supply Transmitter power supply 1, terminal 81/82 (optionally intrinsically safe):


• Output voltage: 24 V ± 15%

• Output current: max. 22 mA (at U out

• Impedance: d 345 : t 16 V, sustained short-circuit proof)

Approvals:

• ATEX

• FM

• CSA

Transmitter power supply 2, terminal 91/92:


• Output voltage: 24 V ± 15%

• Output current: max. 250 mA (sustained short-circuit proof)

Endress+Hauser 83

Technical data


RIA452

Transmitter power supply 1 and 2

Galvanic isolation:

• Towards all other circuits

HART ® :

• No HART ® signal influence

10.0.3

Power supply

Current input

81

82

11

12

20..36V DC

20...28V AC

50/60Hz

90...250V AC

50/60Hz

Relay 8

Relay 7

Relay 6

Relay 5

151

152

153

141

142

143

154

155

156

144

145

146

Relay output nc

41

42

43

51

52

53

54

55

56

44

45

46

J1

J2

Relay 4

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1

Relay 1-8

250V AC /30V DC

3 A

Analog output

0..20mA, 0..10V DC

Transmitter power supply unit

24V, <= 250mA

Internal circuits represented by dashed lines.

RS232

1

2

3

4

Digital inputs acc. to DIN 19240

Voltage level: -3...5 V low,

12...30 V high

Input current typ. 3 mA

(with overload and reverse polarity protection)

Input voltage max. 34.5 V

Sampling frequency max. 10 Hz

Digital output, passive open collector max. 24V, 200mA

Fig. 22: Terminal assignment of process display unit

Universal input option

The device can be optionally equipped with a universal input instead of a current input.

84 Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Technical data

Fig. 23: Universal input terminal assignment (option)

Supply voltage

Power consumption

Connection data interface

Power supply 90...250 V AC 50/60 Hz

Low voltage power supply 20...36 V DC, 20...28 V AC 50/60 Hz max. 24 VA

RS232

• Connection: jack socket 3.5 mm, rear of device

• Transmission protocol: ReadWin ® 2000

• Transmission rate: 38,400 Baud

Reference operating conditions

Maximum measured error

10.0.4

Performance characteristics

Power supply: 230 V AC ±10%, 50 Hz ±0.5 Hz

Warm-up period: 90 min

Ambient temperature range: 25 °C (77 °F)

Current input:

Accuracy

Resolution

Temperature drift

0.1% of full scale

13 bit d 0.4%/10K (d 0.22%/10 °F)

Universal input:

Accuracy

Input: Range:

Current 0...20 mA, 0...5 mA, 4...20 mA

Overrange: up to 22 mA

Maximum measured error of measuring range

(oMR):

± 0.10%

Endress+Hauser 85

Technical data

86

RIA452

Voltage > 1 V 0...10 V, ± 10 V, ± 30 V

Voltage d 1 V

Resistance thermometer

± 1 V, 0...1 V, 0...200 mV, 0...100 mV, ± 150 mV

Pt100, -200...600 °C (-328 °F...1112 °F)

(IEC751, JIS1604, GOST)

Pt500, -200...600 °C (-328 °F...1112 °F)

(IEC751, JIS1604)

Pt1000, -200...600 °C (-328 °F...1112 °F)

(IEC751, JIS1604)

Cu100, -200...200 °C (-328...392 °F) (GOST)

Cu50, -200...200 °C (-328...392 °F) (GOST)

Pt50, -200...600 °C (-328...1112 °F) (GOST)

30...3000

: Resistance measurement

Thermocouples Type J (Fe-CuNi), -210...999.9 °C (-346...1831 °F)

(IEC584)

Type K (NiCr-Ni), -200...1372 °C (-328...2501 °F)

(IEC584)

Type T (Cu-CuNi), -270...400 °C (-454...752 °F)

(IEC584)

Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi), -270...1300 °C (-

454...2372 °F)

(IEC584)

Type B (Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh), 0...1820 °C (32...3308 °F)

(IEC584)

Type D (W3Re/W25Re), 0...2315 °C (32...4199 °F)

(ASTME998)

Type C (W5Re/W26Re), 0...2315 °C (32...4199 °F)

(ASTME998)

Type L (Fe-CuNi), -200...900 °C (-328...1652 °F)

(DIN43710, GOST)

Type U (Cu-CuNi), -200...600 °C (-328...1112 °F)

(DIN43710)

Type S (Pt10Rh-Pt), 0...1768 °C (32...3214.4 °F)

(IEC584)

Type R (Pt13Rh-Pt), -50...1768 °C (-58...3214.4 °F)

(IEC584)

± 0.10%

± 0.10%

4-wire: ± (0.10% oMR + 0.3K (0.54 °F))

3-wire: ± (0.15% oMR + 0.8K (1.44 °F))

4-wire: ± (0.20% oMR + 0.3K (0.54 °F))

3-wire: ± (0.20% oMR + 0.8K (1.44 °F))

4-wire: ± (0.20% oMR + 0.3K (0.54 °F))

3-wire: ± (0.20% oMR + 0.8K (1.44 °F))

± (0.15% oMR +0.5K) from -100 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +0.9 °F) from -148 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +0.5K) from -130 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +0.9 °F) from -202 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +0.5K) from -200 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +0.9 °F) from -328 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +0.5K) from -100 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +0.9 °F) from -148 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +1.5K) from 600 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +2.7 °F) from 1112 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +1.5K) from 500 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +2.7 °F) from 932 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +1.5K) from 500 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +2.7 °F) from 932 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +0.5K) from -100 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +0.9 °F) from -148 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +0.5K) from -100 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +0.9 °F) from -148 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +3.5K) for 0...100 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +6.3 °F) for 32...212 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +1.5K) for 100...1768 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +2.7 °F) for 212...3214.4 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +3.5K) for 0...100 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +6.3 °F) for 32...212 °F)

± (0.15% oMR +1.5K) for 100...1768 °C

(± (0.15% oMR +2.7 °F) for 212...3214.4 °F)

Resolution 16 bit

Temperature drift

Temperature drift: d 0.1%/10K (0.056%/10 °F)

Current output:

Linearity

Resolution

Temperature drift

Output ripple

0.1% of full scale

13 bit d 0.1%/10K (0.056%/10 °F)

10 mV to 500 : for d 50 kHz

Voltage output

Linearity 0.1% of full scale

Endress+Hauser

RIA452

Installation instructions

Environment

Resolution

Temperature drift

13 bit d 0.1%/10K (0.056%/10 °F)

10.0.5

Installation

Mounting location

Panel, cutout 92x92 mm (3.62x3.62") (see 'Mechanical construction').

Orientation

Horizontal +/- 45 in every direction

Ambient temperature range

-20 to +60 °C (-4 to 140 °F)

Storage temperature

-30 to +70 °C (-22 to 158 °F)

Operating height

< 3000 m (9842 ft) above MSL

Climate class

As per IEC 60654-1, Class B2

Condensation

Front: permitted

Casing: not permitted

Degree of protection

Front IP 65 / NEMA 4

Casing IP 20

Shock and vibration resistance

2(+3/-0) Hz - 13.2 Hz: ±1.0 mm

13.2 Hz - 100 Hz: 0.7 g

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

• Interference immunity:

To IEC 61326 industrial environments / NAMUR NE 21

• Interference emissions:

To IEC 61326 Class A

Technical data

Endress+Hauser 87

Technical data

Design, dimensions

10.0.6

Mechanical construction

Fig. 24: Data in mm (data in inches in brackets)

RIA452

Weight

Material

Terminals

Fig. 25: Panel cutout (data in mm, data in inches in brackets) approx. 500 g (1.1 lb)

• Housing front: ABS plastic, galvanised

• Housing casing: plastic PC10GF

Pluggable screw terminals, range 1.5 mm 2 ( i 14 AWG) solid, 1.0 mm 2 ( i 18 AWG) stranded with ferrule

88 Endress+Hauser

RIA452

Display elements

10.0.7

Human interface

Operating elements

Remote operation

Fig. 26: LC display of process display unit

Pos 1: Device status LEDs: green - device ready for operation; red - device or sensor malfunction

Pos. 2: Bargraph with overreach and underreach

Pos. 3: 7-digit 14-segment display

Pos. 4: Unit and text field 9x77 dot matrix

Pos. 5: Limit value flags 1...8

Pos. 6: Status display, digital inputs

Pos. 7: Symbol for 'device operation blocked'

• Display range

-99999 to +99999

• Signalling

– Relay activation

– Measuring range overrange/underrange

Jog/shuttle dial

Configuration

The device can be configured with the PC software ReadWin ® 2000.

Interface

TDL interface at device; connection to PC via USB box (see 'Accessories')

RS232 interface at device; connection with serial interface cable (see 'Accessories')

Technical data

Endress+Hauser 89

Technical data RIA452

CE mark

Ex approval

Other standards and guidelines

10.0.8

Certificates and approvals

The device meets the legal requirements of the EU directives. Endress+Hauser confirms that the device has been tested successfully by affixing the CE mark.

Information about currently available Ex versions (ATEX, FM, CSA, etc.) can be supplied by your

E+H Sales Centre on request. All explosion protection data are given in a separate documentation which is available upon request.

• IEC 60529:

Degrees of protection by housing (IP code)

• IEC 61010-1:

Protection measures for electrical equipment for measurement, control, regulation and laboratory procedures

• CSA 1010.1

Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use -

General requirements

• FM 3610

Intrinsically safe apparatus and associated apparatus for use in class 1, 2 and 3, division 1 hazardous (classified) locations

• CSA C22.2.157

Intrinsically safe & non-incendive equipment for use in hazardous locations

• CSA E79-11

Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - intrinsic safety "i"

• EN 50020

Electrical apparatus for hazardous areas - intrinsic safety "I"

10.0.9

Documentation

System components - display unit, top-hat rail devices, overvoltage protection and energy computer (FA016K/09/en)

Supplementary Ex documentation:

ATEX II(1)GD: XA 053R/09/a3

90 Endress+Hauser

RIA452 Index

Index

Numerics

0% value (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

100% value (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

24h (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

A

Adjusting the analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Alternate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Alternate (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Alternating pump control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Analog input

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Analog output

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

B

Bar 0% (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Bar 100% (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Bar rise (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

C

Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Code

User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Comp. Temp (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Configuration

Operating parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Connecting external sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Universal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Connecting the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Connection (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Const. temp (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Contrast (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Count (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Counts (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Current input

Connecting external sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Curve (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

D

Damp (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Dec. factor (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Dec. point (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66–67, 70, 75

Dec. total (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Dec. value (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Dec. Y value (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Del. points (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Delay (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Device malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Digital input

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Dimension (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 74, 76

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Disable

Endress+Hauser

Programming mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Disabling the programming mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

E


Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

F

Factor (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Fail mode (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Fail value (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Func. alt. (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70

G

Grad. Time (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

H

Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Hysteresis (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

I

Incorrect entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Integr. base (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Integration

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Integration (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Integration function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

L

Level (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Limit values

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Linearisation table

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Lock time (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

M

Max. value (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Menu

Analog Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Digital Inp.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

LIN. Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

LINPOINTS 1..X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

MIN MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

91

RIA452 Index

Pulse out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Min. value (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Min/max memory

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

N

Nameplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Namur (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

O

Offset (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66–67

Open circ. (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Operating matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Operating mode

Grad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Operating parameter

Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Out 0% (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Out 100% (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Out damp (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Output range (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

P

Panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Parameter

Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Digital input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Linearisation table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Min/max memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Support points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 84

Progname (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Pulse output

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Pulse width (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Pump monitoring function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

R

Range 1 (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Range 2 (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Range 3 (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Range 4 (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Ref. bargraf (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Ref. integr. (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Ref. Min/Max (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Ref. num. (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 70

Rel. Mode (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 81

Reset (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

92

Reset max (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Reset min (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Runtime (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

S

Sampl. time (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Scaling the analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Sensors

Connecting external - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Setpoint A (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Setpoint B (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Show points (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Signal type (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Sim pulseout (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Simu mA (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Simu relay (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Simu V (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Support points

Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

T

Technical data

Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Terminal assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Universal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Totalizer (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

U

Unit value (function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Universal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Connecting external sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

User code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

User code (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

V

Version (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

X

X value (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Y

Y value (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Endress+Hauser

50

RIA452

Brief overview

For rapid and easy commissioning:

Safety instructions

Æ

Installation

Æ

Wiring

Æ

Display and operating elements

Æ

Commissioning

Device configuration - explanation and use of all the configurable device functions with the associated value ranges and settings.

Block diagram

Analog input:

1 x current (0/4...20 mA) or 1 x universal (I, U, R, TC, RTD) or 1 x intrinsically safe current input

Digital input:

4 x digital status input

Power supply:

90...250 V AC or 20...36 V DC /

20...28 V AC

Interfaces:

1 x RS 232

1 x CDI

Fig. 1: Block diagram RIA452 optional

Page 52

Page 55

Page 56

Page 62

Page 65

Relays:

4 x change-over contact

8 x change-over contact

Output:

Analog (I, U)

Pulse (with integration)

Transmitter power supply:

1 x 250 mA, 24 V DC

1 x 22 mA, 24 V DC, intrinsically safe

Endress+Hauser

BA 158F/00/en/06.03

016705-1000

multicap T

DC 12 TE

DC 11/16/21/26 TEN

DC 11/16/21/26 TES

Level Probes

Operating Instructions

Endress

+

Hauser

The Power of Know How

Measuring System

Left:

Limit detection with separate Nivotester switching unit

Right:

Level measurement with separate Silometer transmitter

Left:

Compact level switch with relay or transistor output

Right:

Compact loop-powered level measurement system with standard 4…20 mA current output.

The FEC 12 is a smart electronic insert which allows remote calibration over the

4…20 mA output

(HART protocol)

Probe Selection

Cover aluminium/plastic for

FEC 12

FEC 22 for

EC .. Z

Type: F6 aluminium

Type: F10 plastic

(formerly F7)

Cover aluminium for

FEC 12

FEC 22

Connection module:

- with RFI-filter for EC .. Z or FEC 12 (IS) (2-pole)

- for FEC 12 (XP) (2-pole)

- for FEC 22 (AC: 8-pole)

DC: 3-pole) for

EC .. Z

Type: T3 aluminium housing with separate connection compartment to

XP, IS version

Cover stainless steel

Type: F8 stainless steel housing

Electronic insert

EC 11 Z

EC 17 Z

EC 37 Z

EC 47 Z

EC 61 Z

EC 72 Z

Electronic insert FEC 12

4…20 mA

Smart

Electronic insert FEC 22

Compact limit switch

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7) 8)

9)

1) DC 12 TE with reinforced rod, fully insulated

2) DC 12 TE with reinforced rod, partially insulated

3) DC 11 TEN with fully insulated rod

4) DC 16 TEN with partially insulated rod

5) DC 21 TEN with fully insulated rope

6) DC 26 TEN with partially insulated rope

7) DC 11, 16, 21, 26 TES with screening against condensation and material build-up at the process connection

8) DC 11, 16, 21, 26 TES with active compensation of conductive material build-up at the probe

9) DC 11, 16, 21, 26 TES with screening and active build-up compensation

Not shown: rod probes DC 11, 16 TEN and TES with ground tube; not for probes with active build-up compensation

2

Notes on Installation Approved Usage

Multicap T capacitance probes are designed for level measurement or limit detection in tanks containing liquids or small silos containing light bulk solids.

They have been designed to operate safely in accordance with current technical and safety standards, and must be installed by qualified personnel in accordance with the instructions which follow.

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility for any damage arising from incorrect use, installation or operation of the equipment. Changes or modifications not expressly approved in the following instructions or by the bodies responsible for compliance may make the user’s authority to operate the equipment null and void.

Personnel

The equipment may be installed, commissioned and maintained by authorised personnel only.

The instructions which follow must have been read and understood before the equipment is installed.

Explosion Hazardous Areas

When installing equipment in explosion hazardous areas the instructions included in the accompanying certification as well as any local standards must be observed.

Please note that where the quoted technical data differs from that in the certificate, the certificate applies.

Operating Conditions

Before installing the probe, check that it is suitable for the operating conditions to be encountered, in particular:

- the chemical resistance of all probe materials

- the permitted operating temperature and pressure

- the approvals for use in explosion hazardous areas.

Unpacking

To avoid damage to the probe, remove the packaging on-site just before mounting.

Compare the code on the nameplate of the probe with the product designation on Page 14...18 to ensure that the correct probe is mounted.

Check the probe length (for shortening see page 5).

Preparations for

Installation

When installing in explosion hazardous areas observe all national and local regulations as well as the specifications in the certificate.

When the electronic insert is not installed, connect the probe terminal in the housing to the ground terminal.

Possibilities for connection:

Insert plug or wire jumper in both sockets - to be found adjacent to the central thread.

Before the electronic insert is installed, remove the plug or jumper.

1

2

Grounding the probe rod or rope in the housing:

1) type F6 / F8 / F10

2) type T3

A Jumper, e.g. made from bare wire,

1.5 mm

2

B Plug: supplied with probes without electronic insert

B

919247-1000 or

A

15 max.

1.4

min.

1.1

e.g. 1.5 mm² or

AWG 16 / SWG 18

3

Mounting

Probe with parallel thread G ¾ A and with sealing ring:

Tighten at the hexagonal nut to max. 100 Nm

(G 1 A to max. 180 Nm)

Do not tighten by rotating the housing!

Mounting the probe

Protect the insulation

Ensure that the insulation of the probe is not damaged when inserting the probe through the process connection of the vessel.

41

Probe with Triclamp, sanitary thread or flange:

Use a sealing material suitable for the application.

If the flange is PTFE-cladded, then this is generally a suitable seal up to the permitted operating pressure.

Probe with thread

- G ¾ A or G 1 A (parallel):

Use the elastomer/fibre seal provided or any other chemically resistant seal which can withstand temperatures up to 300 °C.

- ¾ - 14 NPT or 1 - 11½ NPT (tapered):

Wrap suitable sealing material around the thread.

- When tightening, rotate the probe at the hexagonal nut only, not at the housing!

- For probes with a G ¾ A parallel thread and seal: a torque of 30 Nm is sufficient for a tight seal against pressures in the vessel up to 25 bar.

(G 1 A: sufficient torque = 50 Nm).

1.

Rotating the small housing

(type F6, F8, F10)

1. - 2. - 3.

Below right:

Protective cover for the small housing

(type F6, F10).

Always to be used when the probe is mounted outdoors

2.

1.

3...4 x

... 280°

2.

3.

3.

Rotating the Housing

The housing can be rotated to reposition the cable entry.

In order to provide optimal protection from the entry of moisture, particular when the probe is mounted outdoors, we strongly recommend:

- A probe mounted laterally in the tank with one cable entry, should have the cable entry pointing downwards

- A probe mounted laterally in the tank with two cable entries, should have both cable entries positioned horizontally

- When mounted with protective cover the cable entries should always be positioned horizontally

Small housing (type F6, F8, F10)

- Unscrew cover

- Loosen the Phillips screw in the base of the housing by 3 or 4 turns

- The housing can now be rotated through 280° from one stop to the other

- Retighten the Phillips screw in the base of the housing.

Large housing (type T3)

- Loosen the Phillips screw on the housing collar

- The housing can now be rotated through 280° from one stop to the other

- Retighten the Phillips screw at the housing collar.

Rotating the large housing (type T3)

1. - 2. - 3.

4

Sealing the Probe Housing

It is important that no moisture enters the probe housing when mounting the probe, connecting the electronic insert or when operating the probe.

The housing cover and the cable entries must, therefore, always be screwed tight.

The O-ring seal at the housing cover and the thread of the aluminium cover are both smeared with a lubricant when delivered.

If the lubricant has been removed, it must be replaced e.g. with silicone or graphite, so that the cover is an air-tight seal and the aluminium thread does not seize when screwed down.

Under no circumstances should an oil-based lubricant be used as this would destroy the O-ring.

Altering the Probe

Length

A fully insulated rod probe cannot be shortened or lengthened.

Shortening a rope probe

See instructions supplied with the rope shortening kit.

Shortening a partly insulated rod probe

• Clamp the probe by the bare rod, not by the insulation and not by the process connection so that the rod connection is not under strain and cannot be damaged.

Saw off the rod and deburr.

If the uninsulated rod is less than

100 mm, shorten the insulation accordingly.

• Change the length specification stated on the nameplate.

Lengthening a partially insulated rod probe

• Remove the electronic insert from the probe housing

• Weld on a section of rod or tube

(use 1.4435 stainless steel)

Note:

- Do not damage or overheat the insulation

- The weld must be as rugged and corrosion-resistant as the probe rod itself

- A longer or thicker probe rod is subjected to higher loads by the movement of material, the maximum lateral load will be reduced.

- Do not exceed the permitted probe length. See appropriate certificate

• Change the length specification stated on the nameplate

• Replace the electronic insert.

Connection

Refer to the appropriate Technical

Information for connecting the electronic insert EC or FEC in the probe housing.

For T3 housing, the connection designations in the separate connection compartment are the same as those on the built-in electronic insert.

Insulated mounting of the probe in a metal container: Connect the ground terminal of the probe to the container with the aid of a short cable.

Mounting in a plastic container: Connect the ground terminal of the probe to the counterelectrode with the aid of a short cable.

Ensure that the probe housing is tightly sealed.

Calibration

Refer to the operating manual for the transmitter connected or the electronic insert FEC 12 or FEC 22 which is installed.

Replacing components

Mounting without electronic insert

Exchange of electronic inserts

• After the defective electronic insert has been removed and the replacement properly installed, the instrument must be recalibrated and checked for correct function.

• If fully insulated multicap probes are mounted in explosion hazardous areas without the electronic insert, and there is a risk of dangerous electronic discharges, then the probe terminal in the housing must be short-circuited with the ground terminal.

5

Maintenance

Return of Goods

Disposal

Accessories

Supplementary

Documentation

Cleaning and inspecting the vessel:

- Check the probe insulation for damage

- Remove material build-up especially at the process connection

- Check the housing cover and the cable entry for tightness.

Caution!

The probe can be damaged if used as a grip or support when inspecting the container.

PLATZHALTER

If a probe is to be returned to

Endress+Hauser for repair or disposal, then all residue must be removed from it.

This is especially important if the product measured can impair health.

Please do not return goods if the last traces of dangerous products cannot be removed, e.g. product has penetrated into fissures or diffused into plastic parts.

Packaging

All sales and transportation packaging from Endress+Hauser is produced in conformance to the regulations governing packaging for reuse and recycling.

Instruments

For a small charge, Endress+Hauser will accept and recycle any instruments manufactured in its own E+H production program. These will then be disposed of according to the German regulations covering the disposal of electronics.

Delivery to Endress+Hauser,

Hauptstraße 1, 79689 Maulburg,

Germany.

q Protective cover for the small probe housing (type F6, F10) see Technical Information

“Probe accessories”

The protective cover shields the probe from excessive heat and prevents condensation from forming in the housing when temperatures vary over a wide range.

q Slip-on plate for partially insulated probe DC 12 TE for increasing the switching safety for limit detection q Rope shortening kit for fully insulated probes q Rope shortening kit for partially insulated probes

Technical Information q Probe accessories

Technical Information TI 229F/00/en q Electronic insert FEC 12

Technical Information TI 250F/00/en q Electronic insert FEC 22

Technical Information TI 251F/00/en q Electronic insert EC 17 Z

Technical Information TI 268F/00/en q Electronic insert EC 61

Technical Information TI 267F/00/en q Electronic insert EC 37 Z, EC 47 Z

Technical Information TI 271F/00/en q Electronic insert EC 11, EC 72

Technical Information TI 270F/00/en q Transmitters for limit detection and continuous level measurement on request

Certificates

See product structure on page 14/16.

6

Dimensions

(Dimensions in mm)

DC 12 TE

L1 = Length of active probe rod

L2 = Length of partial insulation minimum: 75 mm maximum: length L1 minus 50 mm

Thread options: G ¾ A, G 1 A

¾ - 14 NPT, 1 - 11½ NPT

NPT G

41 AF

NPT G

41 AF

DC 12 TE

Rod probe with reinforced rod for high lateral load

Left: fully insulated

Right: partially insulated

Dimensions

(Dimensions in mm)

DC 11/16/21/26 TEN

L1 = Length of active probe rod or probe rope

L2 = Length of partial insulation minimum: 75 mm maximum: length L1 minus 50 mm


¾ - 14 NPT, 1 -11½ NPT

Left:

DC 11 TEN

Fully insulated rod probe

Centre:

DC 16 TEN

Partially insulated rod probe

Right:

DC 11, 16 TEN with ground tube

(fully or partially insulated probe rod)

ø16 ø12

NPT G

41 AF

NPT G

41 AF

NPT

G

41 AF

ø10 ø8 ø21.3

41 AF

NPT G

41 AF

NPT G

ø2.5

ø4

Left:

DC 21 TEN

Fully insulated rope probe

Right:

DC 26 TEN

Partially insulated rope probe

Tensioning weight with anchor hole

ø22 ø18

7

Dimensions

(Dimensions in mm)

DC 11/16/21/26 TES

All probes on this page are shown with partial insulation. All versions are available with full insulation

L1 = Length of active probe rod or probe rope

L2 = Length of partial insulation see page 7


¾ - 14 NPT, 1 - 11½ NPT

Probes with screening

L3 against condensation and material build-up on the process connection

Left:

Rod probe DC 11 TES or DC 16 TES

Centre:

Rod probe DC 11 TES or DC 16 TES with ground tube

Right:

Rope probe DC 21 TES or DC 26 TES

NPT G

ø21.3

41 AF

NPT G

41 AF

ø21.3

NPT G

41 AF

ø21.3

NPT G

ø19.2

41 AF

NPT G

41 AF

ø19.2

Probes with active build-up compensation

(always 100 mm)

Left:


Right:


NPT G

ø21.3

41 AF

NPT G

41 AF

ø21.3

Probes with screening

L3 and with active build-up compensation

Left:


Right:


L3

The screening is available in three standard lengths:

L3 = 150 mm,

L3 = 250 mm,

L3 = 500 mm

Special lengths on demand

L3 min. 100 mm

L3 max. 1500 mm

8

Dimensions Continued /

Additional

Process Connections

Tapered threads

3 /

4

- 14 NPT and 1 - 11 1 /

2

NPT

Parallel threads

G

3

/

4

A and G 1 A

All probes shown with type F6/F10 housing

Dimensions for type T3 housing are also shown

Dimensions of temperature spacer

NPT G

Flange Triclamp Coupling 2"

Triclamp Coupling 1

1

/

2

“

Triclamp Coupling 1"

Sanitary thread DN 50 Options:

•

Corrosion-resistant steel tag

•

Temperature spacer

60

20

9

Housing Dimensions

Top row:

Housings in aluminium

(type F6) or plastic

(type F10, formerly F7)

Bottom row:

Housings in aluminium

(type T3) with separate connection compartment;

- with RFI filter for small electronic inserts

EC 17 Z, EC 61 Z

EC 37 Z, EC 47 Z,

EC 11 Z, EC 72 Z

- with RFI filter and terminal connection module for

FEC 12 (EEx ia)

- with RFI filter and safety barriers for

FEC 12 (EEx d)

- terminal connection module for FEC 22

Both housings:

- with low cover for small electronic inserts EC .. Z,

- with raised cover for electronic inserts

FEC 12, FEC 22; with two cable entries, one sealed with a blind plug

91

98

~66

Stainless steel housing (type F8) for electronic inserts

EC .. Z/FEC .. , with two cable entries, one sealed with a blind plug.

ø86 ~32 max. 81.5

ø104

ø 86

10

Technical Data

General Information

Operating data

Permitted operating pressures p e and operating temperatures T

B

Manufacturer

Instrument family

Instrument types

Function

Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. D-79689 Maulburg, Germany

Multicap T

DC 12 TE, DC 11, 16, 21, 26 TEN / TES

Probes for capacitive level measurement and limit detection

Operating pressure

Operating temperature

Lateral load on probe rod

Max. tension on probe rope max. 25 bar depending on material - see below max. 200 °C depending on material - see below

DC 12 TE: 30 Nm at 20 °C, static

DC 11, 16: 15 Nm at 20 °C, static

200 N at 20 °C, static

40

30

20

10 p e bar

0

2 bar

1 bar

50 100 150 200

T

B

° C

80 60 40 20

30

20

10 p e bar

0 20 40

2 bar

1 bar

60

T

B

° C

Insulation PTFE, FEP or PFA

Insulation PE

Mounting of the electronic insert as a function of operating temperature T

B and ambient temperature T

U

:

A Basic probe

B Probe with temperature spacer

C Electronic insert in separate housing

D Probe with temperature spacer and electronic insert in separate housing

The graphs A and B apply to all electronic inserts

The graphs C and D apply to the small electronic inserts

EC 17 Z, EC 61 Z,

EC 37 Z, EC 47 Z

EC 11 Z, EC 72 Z

A T

U

° C

EC

FEC

80

40

0

– 80 – 40

– 40

0 40 80 120 160 200

T

B

° C

C Separate housing

EC

T

U

° C

120

80

40

0

– 80 – 40

– 40

0 40 80 120 160 200

T

B

° C

B

80

40

0

– 80 – 40

– 40

0 40 80 120 160 200

D

T

U

° C

Separate housing

EC

FEC

160

120

T

U

° C

EC

80

40

0

– 80 – 40

– 40

0 40 80 120 160 200

Probe Lengths

Total length of rod probe

Total length of rope probe min. 100 mm, max. 3000 mm, see dimensions min. 350 mm, max. 20000 mm, see dimensions

Capacitance values of the probe

Basic capacitance: approx. 30 pF

Temperature spacer: approx. 5 pF

Active build-up compensation: < 10 pF

T

B

° C

T

B

° C

11

Operating data

(continued)

Additional capacitances

Probe 250 mm from a conductive vessel wall

Probe rod: approx. 1.3 pF/100 mm in air

Probe rope: approx. 1.0 pF/100 mm in air

Insulated probe rod in water: approx. 38 pF/100 mm DC TE approx. 50 pF/100 mm DC 11 TEN/TES

Insulated probe rope in water: approx. 20 pF/100 mm

Rod probe with ground tube insulated probe rod uninsulated probe rod in air approx. 6,4 pF/100 mm in water approx. 50 pF/100 mm in air approx. 5,6 pF/100 mm

Probe Lengths for continuous measurement in conducting liquids

EC with

∆C max

= 2000 pF

(EC 47 Z, EC 72 Z, FEC 12)

Rope probe up to 8000 mm

(up to 20000 mm in non conducting liquids)

Rod probe up to 3000 mm

EC with

∆C max

= 4000 pF

(EC 37 Z, EC 11 Z)

Rope probe up to 20000 mm

Rod probe up to 3000 mm

Accuracy:

Length tolerances up to 1 m: +0 mm, - 5 mm rod probe/ -10 mm rope probe up to 3 m: +0 mm, - 10 mm rod probe/ -20 mm rope probe up to 6 m: +0 mm, - 30 mm up to 20 m: +0 mm, - 40 mm

The following specifications apply to fully insulated probes operating in conducting liquids

Linearity error < 1 % for 1 m **

Temperature dependence of the probe rod

Pressure dependence of the probe rod

< 0,1 % per K DC 12 TE **

< 0,12 % per K DC 11 TE **

0,12…0,34 % per bar **

Temperature dependence of the probe rope

Pressure dependence of the probe rope

< 0,1 % per K **

< 0,1 % per bar **

** Error in non-conducting materials insignificant

Process Connections

Parallel thread G ¾ A or G 1 A DIN ISO 228/I, with sealing ring 27x32 or 33x39 to DIN 7603

Tapered thread ¾ - 14 NPT or

1 - 11 ½ NPT

ANSI B 1.20.1

DIN flanges without raised face

DIN 2527, Form B

DIN flanges with tongue

DIN flanges with groove

ANSI flanges

Sanitary thread

Triclamp coupling

DIN 2512, Form F

DIN 2512, Form N

ANSI B 16.5

DIN 11851

ISO 2852

12

Operating data

(Continued)

Materials

Aluminium housing (F6, T3)

Plastic housing (F10)

Sainless steel housing (F8)

Seal for housing cover

GD-Al Si 10 Mg, DIN 1725, plastic coated (blue/grey) fibre-glass reinforced polyester (blue/grey) stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304), unvarnished type F6, T3 housings: O-ring in EPDM (elastomer) type F10 housing: O-ring in silicone rubber type F8 housing: profiled O-ring in silicone

Cable gland IP 66 for cable entry Pg 16

Sealing ring for process connection G 3 /

4

A or G 1 A

Temperature spacer

Probe rod, ground tube process connection, screening, build-up compensation, tensioning weight for rope probe

Polyamide with neoprene CR seal for cable diameter

7...12 mm; ambient temperature up to 80°C

Elastomer-fibre, asbestos-free, resistant to oils, solvents, steam, weak acids and alkalis; up to 300°C and 100 bar

Stainless steel SS 304 (1.4301) or similar

AISI 316L (1.4435)

Probe rope AISI 316 (1.4401)

Further material specifications see Product Structure on Page 14...18

13

Product Structure

DC 12 TE Multicap T DC 12 TE

Rod probe for standard applications

Certificate

A For non-hazardous areas

B ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6

D For non-hazardous areas

E ATEX II 2 G EEx d [ia] IIC T6

Overspill protection to WHG

F ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6

K FM XP


Class I, Div. 1, Groups A-D

R CSA XP Class I, Div. 1, Groups B-D

Y Special version

1 ATEX II 2 G EEx d (ia) IIB T6

2 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIB T6



4 ATEX II 2 G EEx d (ia) IIC T6*

5 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6* Overspill protection to WHG

6 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6*

*) With note: “Avoid electrostatic charge”

Type of insulation

1 Fully insulated probe

6 Partiall insulated probe

Length of insulation L2

A ......mm (75 mm...3000 mm)

B ......mm (75 mm...3000 mm)

C ......mm (75 mm...3000 mm)

Y Special version

1 Fully insulated probe partially insulated PTFE partially insulated PFA partially insulated PE

Active length L1, Material

A ......mm (100 mm...3000 mm) fully insulated PTFE

B ......mm (100 mm...3000 mm) fully insulated PFA

C ......mm (100 mm...3000 mm) fully insulated PE

Y Special version

1 ......mm (100 mm...3000 mm) partially insulated

Process connection, Material

A G ¾ A,

B G 1 A,

Thread ISO 228

Thread ISO 228

316L

316L

C

D

¾” NPT

1” NPT

E DN 50 PN 40

Hygienic connection

Thread ANSI

Thread ANSI

316L

316L

DIN 11851 316L

ISO 2852 316L F DN 40-51 (2”)

Tri-Clamp connection

G DN 38 (1½“)


ISO 2852 316L

316L H DN 25 (1”)


L DN 38 (1½”) removable,


Y Special version

5 Flanged process connection

ISO 2852

ISO 2852 316L, A3

316L

Flange type, Material

1B without process flange connection

1C DN 25 PN 6 B DIN 2527

1D DN 25 PN 25/40 B

1E DN 32 PN 6 B

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

1F DN 32 PN 25/40 B

1G DN 40 PN 6 B

1H DN 40 PN 25/40 B

1K DN 50 PN 6 B

1L DN 50 PN 25/40 B

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

2D DN 25 PN 25/40

2F DN 32 PN 25/40

2H DN 40 PN 25/40

2K DN 50 PN 6

2L DN 50 PN 25/40

3F DN 32 PN 40 F

3H DN 40 PN 40 F

3L DN 50 PN 40 F

4F DN 32 PN 40 N

4H DN 40 PN 40 N

4L DN 50 PN 40 N

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2512

DIN 2512

DIN 2512

DIN 2512

DIN 2512

DIN 2512

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

Basic weight 1,2 kg including

¾“ process connection and F10 housing

Additional weight

0,1 kg/m

0,1 kg/m

0,1 kg/m

1 kg/m

1 kg/m

1 kg/m

0,9 kg/m

0,1 kg

0,1 kg

0,5 kg

0,5 kg

1,2 kg

1,8 kg

2,2 kg

1,4 kg

3,0 kg

1,8 kg

2,2 kg

3,0 kg

1,8 kg

2,2 kg

3,0 kg

0,6 kg

1,2 kg

1,0 kg

1,8 kg

1,2 kg

2,2 kg

1,4 kg

3,0 kg

DC 12 TE -

Continued Page 15

Product designation (first part)

14


(Continued)

Flange type, Material (Continued)

5A

5B

5E

5F

5G

5H

6A

6B

6E

1"

1"

2"

2"

1"

1"

150 lbs,

300 lbs,

1½“ 150 lbs,

1½” 300 lbs,

150 lbs,

300 lbs,

150 lbs,

300 lbs,

1½“ 150 lbs,

9Y Special version

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

6F 1½” 300 lbs, RF,

6G 2" 150 lbs, RF,

6H 2" 300 lbs, RF,

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316Ti

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

Additional weight

Electronic insert

A prepared for ECxx electronic insert with low housing cover

B with EC 61 Z, 3-wire insert

C with EC 11 Z, 3-wire Tx, 33 kHz

D with EC 72 Z, 3-wire Tx, 1 Mhz

E with EC 17 Z, 2-wire PFM

G with EC 37 Z, 2-wire PFM, 33 kHz

H with EC 47 Z, 2-wire PFM, 1 MHz

K with FEC 12, 2-wire 4-20 mA HART

M with FEC 22, 90…253 V AC, DPDT relay

N with FEC 22, 10…55 V DC, 3-wire PNP

P with FEC 14, PROFIBUS PA

V with FEC 14, Local operation FHB 20 and PROFIBUS PA

Y Special version

2 prepared for FECxx electronic insert with raised housing cover 0,3 kg**

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,3 kg**+ 0,3 kg

0,3 kg**+ 0,3 kg

0,3 kg**+ 0,3 kg

**) Additional weight for raised cover

Housing

A Polyester F10 Housing gland Pg16

E Polyester

F Aluminium

F10 Housing HNA24x1,5


G Aluminium T3 Housing HNA24x1,5

K Polyester F10 Housing gland M20x1,5

L Aluminium F6 Housing gland M20x1,5

M Aluminium T3 Housing gland M20x1,5

N Aluminium T3 Housing PA-plug M12

O 316L

P Polyester

F8 Housing PA-plug M12

F10 Housing Nema4X, NPT ½”

5

6

3

4

1

2

R Aluminium F6 Housing Nema4X, NPT ½”

S Aluminium T3 Housing Nema4X, NPT ¾”

T Aluminium T3 Housing entry G ½ A

Y Special version

316L

316L

F8 Housing gland Pg13,5

F8 Housing entry G ½”

316L

316L

Polyester

Aluminium

F8 Housing gland M20x1,5

F8 Housing entry NPT ½”



Option

1 Basic version

2 TAG number

3 Temperature spacer

4 Temperature spacer and TAG number

9 Special version

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66 1,0 kg

IP66 1,0 kg

IP66 1,0 kg

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,7 kg

1,2 kg

1,3 kg

2,5 kg

2,2 kg

3,0 kg

0,7 kg

1,2 kg

1,3 kg

2,5 kg

2,2 kg

3,0 kg

Please don’t forget:

Length of

Partial insulation

Active probe length

L2

L1 mm mm

DC 12 TE -

15

Complete product designation for DC 12 TE


DC 11 TEN- MULTICAP T DC 11 TEN

Fully insulated rod probe for standard applications


Partially insulated rod probe for standard applications


Fully insulated rope probe for standard applications


Partially insulated rope probe for standard applications

DC 11 TES- MULTICAP T DC 11 TES

Fully insulated rod probe with protection features


Partially insulated rod probe with protection features


Fully insulated rope probe with protection feature


Partially insulated rope probe with protection features

Certificate

A For non-hazardous areas

B ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6

D For non-hazardous areas Overspill protection to WHG

E ATEX II 2 G

Y Special version

EEx d (ia) IIC T6

1 ATEX II 2 G EEx d (ia) IIB T6


4 ATEX II 2 G EEx d (ia) IIC T6*

6 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6*

*) With note: “Avoid electrostatic charge”

Build-up protection

DC 11, 16, 21, 26 TEN

A Protection feature not selected

DC 11, 16, 21, 26 TES

B 100 mm active guard

C 150 mm L3 screening

D 250 mm L3 screening

E 500 mm L3 screening

F ......mm (100 mm...1500 mm) L3 screening

G 150 mm L3 screening and

100 mm active guard

H 250 mm L3 screening and

100 mm active guard

K 500 mm L3 screening and

100 mm active guard

L ......mm (100 mm...1500 mm) L3 screening and

100 mm active guard

Y Special version

Basic weight including

¾“ process connection and F10 housing, for rope probes with tensioning weight

1,2 kg

1,2 kg

1,4 kg

1,4 kg

1,2 kg

1,2 kg

1,4 kg

1,4 kg

Additional weight

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,3 kg

0,6 kg

1,2 kg/m

0,4 kg

0,5 kg

0,9 kg

1,7 kg/m + 0,2 kg

Probe insulation

DC 11 TEN/TES, DC 21 TEN/TES

1 Fully insulated probe

DC 16 TEN/TES

A ......mm (75 mm...3000 mm) partially insulated PTFE

DC 26 TEN/TES

D rope type; 2,5 mm

9 Special version

Active length L1, Material

DC 11 TEN/TES

1 ......mm (100 mm...3000 mm)

2 ......mm (100 mm...3000 mm) with ground tube

DC 16 TEN/TES

1 ......mm (100 mm...3000 mm)

2 ......mm (100 mm...3000 mm) with ground tube

DC 21 TEN/TES

1 ......mm (100 mm...20000 mm) tensioning weight with anchor hole

DC 26 TEN/TES

1 ......mm (100 mm...20000 mm)

9 Special version

316L+PTFE

316L+PTFE

Rod 316L

Rod 316L

316+FEP

316+FEP

0,06 kg/m

0,5 kg/m

1,2 kg/m

0,4 kg/m

1,1 kg/m

0,04 kg/m

0,03 kg/m

Continued Page 17

DC . . TE . Product designation (first part)

16


(Continued)

Process connection, Material

A G ¾ A

B G 1 A

Thread ISO 228

Thread ISO 228

C

D

¾” NPT

1” NPT

E DN 50 PN 40

Thread ANSI

Thread ANSI

DIN 11851

Hygienic connection

F DN 40-51 (2”)


ISO 2852

Y Special version

5 Flanged process connection

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

Flange type, Material

1B without process flange connection

1C DN 25 PN 6 B DIN 2527

1D DN 25 PN 25/40 B

1E DN 32 PN 6 B

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

1F DN 32 PN 25/40 B

1G DN 40 PN 6 B

1H DN 40 PN 25/40 B

1K DN 50 PN 6 B

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

1L DN 50 PN 25/40 B

2D DN 25 PN 25/40

2F DN 32 PN 25/40

2H DN 40 PN 25/40

2K DN 50 PN 6

2L DN 50 PN 25/40

3F DN 32 PN 40 F

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2527

DIN 2512

3H DN 40 PN 40 F

3L DN 50 PN 40 F

4F DN 32 PN 40 N

4H DN 40 PN 40 N

4L DN 50 PN 40 N

5A 1" 150 lbs, RF,

5B 1" 300 lbs, RF,

5E 1½“ 150 lbs, RF,

5F 1½” 300 lbs, RF,

5G 2" 150 lbs, RF,

5H 2" 300 lbs, RF,

6A 1" 150 lbs, RF,

6B 1" 300 lbs, RF,

6E 1½“ 150 lbs, RF,

6F 1½” 300 lbs, RF,

6G 2" 150 lbs, RF,

6H 2" 300 lbs, RF,

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

316L

DIN 2512

DIN 2512

DIN 2512

DIN 2512

316L

316L

316L

316L

DIN 2512 316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316Ti

ANSI B16.5

PTFE >316L only DC 11, 16 TEN/TES and DC 21 TEN

7A 10 K 25 A RF, JIS B2210 316L

7B 10 K 40 A

7C 10 K 50 A

RF,

RF,

JIS B2210 316L

JIS B2210 316L

7D 10 K 80 A

7L 10 K 100 A

8A 10 K 25 A

8B 10 K 40 A

8C 10 K 50 A

8D 10 K 80 A

8L 10 K 100 A

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

RF,

JIS B2210

JIS B2210

JIS B2210

JIS B2210

JIS B2210

316L

316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

PTFE >316L

JIS B2210 PTFE >316L

JIS B2210 PTFE >316L

DC 21 TES

7C 10 K 50 A

8A 10 K 25 A

RF,

RF,

JIS B2210

JIS B2210

316L

PTFE >316L

DC 26 TEN/TES

7A 10 K 25 A

7C 10 K 50 A

8A 10 K 25 A

9Y Special version

RF,

RF,

RF,

JIS B2210

JIS B2210

JIS B2210

316L

316L

PTFE >316L

Additional weight

0,1 kg

0,1 kg

0,5 kg

0,5 kg

2,2 kg

3,0 kg

1,8 kg

2,2 kg

3,0 kg

0,7 kg

1,2 kg

1,3 kg

2,5 kg

2,2 kg

3,0 kg

0,7 kg

1,2 kg

1,3 kg

2,5 kg

2,2 kg

3,0 kg

0,6 kg

1,2 kg

1,0 kg

1,8 kg

1,2 kg

2,2 kg

1,4 kg

3,0 kg

1,2 kg

1,8 kg

2,2 kg

1,4 kg

3,0 kg

1,8 kg

DC . . TE . DC . . TE . -

Continued Page 18

Product designation (second part)

17

Electronic insert Additional weight

A prepared for ECxx electronic insert with low housing cover

B

C

D

E

G

H

K with EC 61 Z, 3-wire insert with EC 11 Z, 3-wire Tx, 33 kHz with EC 72 Z, 3-wire Tx, 1 Mhz with EC 17 Z, 2-wire PFM with EC 37 Z, 2-wire PFM, 33 kHz with EC 47 Z, 2-wire PFM, 1 MHz with FEC 12, 2-wire 4-20 mA HART

M with FEC 22, 90…253 V AC, DPDT relay

N with FEC 22, 10…55 V DC, 3-wire PNP

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

0,3 kg**+ 0,3 kg

0,3 kg**+ 0,3 kg

0,3 kg**+ 0,3 kg

P with FEC 14, PROFIBUS PA

V with FEC 14, Local operation FHB 20 and PROFIBUS PA

Y Special version

2 prepared for FECxx electronic insert with raised housing cover 0,3 kg**

**) Additional weight for raised cover

Housing

A Polyester

E Polyester

F10 Housing gland Pg16


F Aluminium F6 Housing HNA24x1,5

G Aluminium T3 Housing HNA24x1,5

K Polyester F10 Housing gland M20x1,5

L Aluminium F6 Housing gland M20x1,5

M Aluminium T3 Housing gland M20x1,5

N Aluminium T3 Housing PA-plug M12

O 316L

P Polyester


F10 Housing Nema4X, NPT ½”

S Aluminium T3 Housing Nema4X, NPT ¾”

T Aluminium T3 Housing entry G ½ A

Y Special version

1 316L

2 316L

F8 Housing gland Pg13,5

F8 Housing entry G ½”

3 316L

4 316L

F8 Housing gland M20x1,5

F8 Housing entry NPT ½”

5 Polyester F10 Housing PA-plug M12

6 Aluminium F6 Housing PA-plug M12

Option

1 Basic version

2 TAG number

3 Temperature spacer

4 Temperature spacer and TAG number

9 Special version

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66 1,0 kg

IP66 1,0 kg

IP66 1,0 kg

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

IP66

0,2 kg

0,2 kg

Please don’t forget:

Length of

Screening L3

Partial insulation L2

Active probe length L1 mm mm mm

DC . . TE . -

18

Complete product designation for DC . . TEN / TES

19

Europe

Austria

❑ Endress+Hauser Ges.m.b.H.

Wien

Tel. (02 22) 8 80 56-0, Fax (02 22) 8 80 56-35

Belarus

Belorgsintez

Minsk

Tel. (01 72) 26 31 66, Fax (01 72) 26 31 11

Belgium

❑ Endress+Hauser S.A./N.V.

Brussels

Tel. (02) 2 48 06 00, Fax (02) 2 48 05 53

Bulgaria

INTERTECH-AUTOMATION

Sofia

Tel. (02) 65 28 09, Fax (02) 65 28 09

Croatia

❑ Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co.

Zagreb

Tel. (01) 41 58 12, Fax (01) 44 78 59

Cyprus

I+G Electrical Services Co. Ltd.

Nicosia

Tel. (02) 48 47 88, Fax (02) 48 46 90

Czech Republic


Ostrava

Tel. (0 69) 6 61 19 48, Fax (0 69) 6 61 28 69

Denmark

❑ Endress+Hauser A/S

Søborg

Tel. (31) 67 31 22, Fax (31) 67 30 45

Estonia

Elvi-Aqua-Teh

Tartu

Tel. (7) 42 27 26, Fax (7) 42 27 26

Finland

❑ Endress+Hauser Oy

Espoo

Tel. (90) 8 59 61 55, Fax (90) 8 59 60 55

France

❑ Endress+Hauser

Huningue

Tel. 89 69 67 68, Fax 89 69 48 02

Germany

Endress+Hauser Meßtechnik GmbH+Co.

Weil am Rhein

Tel. (0 76 21) 9 75-01, Fax (0 76 21) 9 75-5 55

Great Britain

❑ Endress+Hauser Ltd.

Manchester

Tel. (01 61) 2 86 50 00, Fax (01 61) 9 98 18 41

Greece

I & G Building Services Automation S.A.

Athens

Tel. (01) 9 24 15 00, Fax (01) 9 22 17 14

Hungary

Mile Ipari-Elektro

Budapest

Tel. (01) 2 61 55 35, Fax (01) 2 61 55 35

Iceland

Vatnshreinsun HF

Reykjavik

Tel. (05) 88 96 16, Fax (05) 33 20 22

Ireland

Flomeaco Company Ltd.

Kildare

Tel. (0 45) 86 86 15, Fax (0 45) 86 81 82

Italy

❑ Endress+Hauser Italia S.p.A.

Cernusco s/N Milano

Tel. (02) 92 10 64 21, Fax (02) 92 10 71 53

Latvia

Raita Ltd.

Riga

Tel. (02) 25 47 95, Fax (02) 7 25 89 33

Lithuania

Agava Ltd.

Kaunas

Tel. (07) 20 24 10, Fax (07) 20 74 14 http://www.endress.com

Luxembourg

❑ Endress+Hauser S.A./N.V.

Brussels

Tel. (02) 2 48 06 00, Fax (02) 2 48 05 53

Netherlands

❑ Endress+Hauser B.V.

Naarden

Tel. (0 35) 6 95 86 11, Fax (0 35) 6 95 88 25

Norway

❑

Endress+Hauser A/S

Tranby

Tel. (0 32) 85 10 85, Fax (0 32) 85 11 12

Poland

Endress+Hauser Polska Sp. z o.o.

Warsaw

Tel. (0 22) 6 51 01 74, Fax (0 22) 6 51 01 78

Portugal

Tecnisis - Tecnica de Sistemas Industriais

Linda-a-Velha

Tel. (01) 4 17 26 37, Fax (01) 4 18 52 78

Romania

Romconseng SRL

Bucharest

Tel. (01) 4 10 16 34, Fax (01) 4 10 16 34

Russia

Avtomatika-Sever Ltd.

St. Petersburg

Tel. (08 12) 5 55 07 00, Fax (08 12) 5 56 13 21

Slovak Republic

Transcom technik s.r.o.

Bratislava

Tel. (7) 5 21 31 61, Fax (7) 5 21 31 81

Slovenia

Endress+Hauser D.O.O.

Ljubljana

Tel. (0 61) 1 59 22 17, Fax (0 61) 1 59 22 98

Spain

❑ Endress+Hauser S.A.

Barcelona

Tel. (93) 4 73 46 44, Fax (93) 4 73 38 39

Sweden

❑ Endress+Hauser AB

Sollentuna

Tel. (08) 6 26 16 00, Fax (08) 6 26 94 77

Switzerland

❑ Endress+Hauser AG

Reinach/BL 1

Tel. (0 61) 7 15 62 22, Fax (0 61) 7 11 16 50

Turkey

Intek Endüstriyel Ölcü ve Kontrol Sistemleri

Istanbul

Tel. (02 12) 2 75 13 55, Fax (02 12) 2 66 27 75

Ukraine

Industria Ukraïna

Kyiv

Tel. (44) 2 68 52 13, Fax (44) 2 68 52 13

America

Argentina

Servotron SACIFI

Buenos Aires

Tel. (01) 3 31 01 68, Fax (01) 3 34 01 04

Bolivia

Tritec S.R.L.

Cochabamba

Tel. (0 42) 5 09 81, Fax (0 42) 5 09 81

Brazil

Servotek

Sao Paulo

Tel. (0 11) 5 36 34 55, Fax (0 11) 5 36 34 57

Canada


Burlington, Ontario

Tel. (9 05) 6 81 92 92, Fax (9 05) 6 81 94 44

Chile

DIN Instrumentos Ltda.

Santiago

Tel. (02) 2 05 01 00, Fax (02) 2 25 81 39

Colombia

Colsein Ltd.

Santafe de Bogota D.C.

Tel. (01) 2 36 76 59, Fax (01) 6 10 78 68

Costa Rica

EURO-TEC S.A.

San Jose

Tel. 2 96 15 42, Fax 2 96 15 42

Ecuador

Insetec Cia. Ltda.

Quito

Tel. (02) 46 18 33, Fax (02) 46 18 33

El Salvador

ACISA

San Salvador, C.A.

Tel. (02) 84 07 48

Guatemala

ACISA Automatiziacion Y Control

Ciudad de Guatemala, C.A.

Tel. (02) 32 74 32, Fax (02) 32 74 31

Mexico

Maquinaria y Accesorios S.A. de C.V.

Mexico D.F.

Tel. (5) 5 63 81 88, Fax (5) 3 93 29 37

Paraguay

Incoel S.R.L.

Asuncion

Tel. (0 21) 20 34 65, Fax (0 21) 2 65 83

Peru

Esim S.A.

Lima

Tel. (01) 4 71 46 61, Fax (01) 4 71 09 93

Uruguay

Circular S.A.

Montevideo

Tel. (02) 92 57 85, Fax (02) 92 91 51

USA

❑ Endress+Hauser Inc.

Greenwood, Indiana

Tel. (3 17) 5 35-71 38, Fax (3 17) 5 35-14 89

Venezuela

H. Z. Instrumentos C.A.

Caracas

Tel. (02) 9 79 88 13, Fax (02) 9 79 96 08

Africa

Egypt

IAB Office

Et Cairo

Tel. (02) 3 61 61 17, Fax (02) 3 60 96 76

Morocco

Oussama S.A.

Casablanca

Tel. (02) 24 13 38, Fax (02) 40 56 02

Nigeria

J F Technical Invest. Nig. Ltd.

Lagos

Tel. (1) 62 23 45 46, Fax (1) 62 23 45 48

South Africa

❑ Endress+Hauser Pty. Ltd.

Sandton

Tel. (0 11) 4 44 13 86, Fax (0 11) 4 44 19 77

Tunisia

Controle, Maintenance et Regulation

Tunis

Tel. (01) 79 30 77, Fax (01) 78 85 95

Asia

China

Endress+Hauser Beijing

Beijing

Tel. (0 10) 4 07 21 20, Fax (0 10) 4 03 45 36

Hong Kong

❑ Endress+Hauser (H.K.) Ltd.

Hong Kong

Tel. 25 28 31 20, Fax 28 65 41 71

India

❑ Endress+Hauser India Branch Office

Bombay

Tel. (022) 6 04 55 78, Fax (022) 6 04 02 11

Indonesia

PT Grama Bazita

Jakarta

Tel. (21) 7 97 50 83, Fax (21) 7 97 50 89

Japan

❑ Sakura Endress Co., Ltd.

Tokyo

Tel. (04 22) 54 06 11, Fax (04 22) 55 02 75

Malaysia

❑ Endress+Hauser (M) Sdn. Bhd.

Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan

Tel. (03) 7 33 48 48, Fax (03) 7 33 88 00

Philippines

Brenton Industries Inc.

Makati Metro Manila

Tel. (2) 8 43 06 61, Fax (2) 8 17 57 39

Singapore

❑ Endress+Hauser (S.E.A.) Pte., Ltd.

Singapore

Tel. 4 68 82 22, Fax 4 66 68 48

South Korea

Hitrol Co. Ltd.

Kyung Gi-Do

Tel. (032) 6 72 31 31, Fax (32) 6 72 00 90

Taiwan

Kingjarl Corporation

Taipei R.O.C.

Tel. (02) 7 18 39 38, Fax (02) 7 13 41 90

Thailand


Bangkok

Tel. (2) 2 72 36 74, Fax (2) 2 72 36 73

Vietnam

Tan Viet Bao Co. Ltd.

Ho Chi Minh City

Tel. (08) 8 33 52 25, Fax (08) 8 33 52 27

Iran

Telephone Technical Services Co. Ltd.

Tehran

Tel. (0 21) 8 82 74 26, Fax(0 21) 8 82 73 36

Israel

Instrumetrics Industrial Control Ltd.

Tel-Aviv

Tel. (03) 6 48 02 05, Fax (03) 6 47 19 92

Jordan

A.P. Parpas Engineering S.A.

Amman

Tel. (06) 83 92 83, Fax (06) 83 92 05

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Intrah

Dammam

Tel. (03) 8 34 78 79, Fax (03) 8 34 48 32

Kuwait

Kuwait Maritime & Mercantile Co. K.S.C.

Safat

Tel. 2 43 47 52, Fax 2 44 14 86

Lebanon

Network Engineering Co.

Jbeil

Tel. (3) 25 40 52, Fax (9) 94 40 80

Sultanate of Oman

Mustafa & Jawad Sience & Industry Co.

L.L.C.

Ruwi

Tel. 60 20 09, Fax 60 70 66

United Arab Emirates

Descon Trading EST.

Dubai

Tel. (04) 35 95 22, Fax (04) 35 96 17

Yemen

Yemen Company for Ghee and Soap Industry

Taiz

Tel. (04) 23 06 65, Fax (04) 21 23 38

Australia + New Zealand

Australia

GEC Alsthom LTD.

Sydney

Tel. (02) 6 45 07 77, Fax (02) 7 43 70 35

New Zealand

EMC Industrial Instrumentation

Auckland

Tel. (09) 4 44 92 29, Fax (09) 4 44 11 45

All other countries


Instruments International

Weil am Rhein

Tel. (0 76 21) 9 75-02, Fax (0 76 21) 97 53 45

Endress

+

Hauser


❑ Members of the Endress+Hauser group 05.02/PT

BA 158F/00/en/06.03

016705-1000

CCS/CV8 016705- 1000

BA 148F/00/en/07.95 (b)

Software Version 1.x

Part No. 016700-1000

Electronic insert

FEC 12 with

HART Protocol

Level Measurement

Operating Instructions

Endress

+

Hauser


Abb. 1

Short instructions for calibrating the FEC 12 electronic insert using its own operating elements

Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART)

Short Instructions

The short instructions are intended for trained personnel who have read and understood the operating instructions in this manual. They allow a quick standard calibration of the electronic insert using the its own operating elements. A detailed description of calibration and operation is given in Sections 3 - 5.

lid with short instructions

FEC 12

Linearisation at FEC 12 linear: horiz. cylinder:

Reset to factory settings:

Empty calibration:

Full calibration:

Lock parameters:

Unlock parameters:

Linearisation at handheld terminal

5 s

.

.

.

✔

LED 2 s

✔ LED 2 s


Table of Contents

Short Instructions

Notes on Safety . . . . . . . . . . 2

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.1 Application

1.2 Measuring System

1.3 Operating Principle

3

3

3

2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.1 Electrical Connection

2.2 Technical Data

4

5

3 Operating Elements . . . . . . . 6

3.1 FEC 12 Electronic Insert

3.2 HART Communicator DXR 275

3.3 HART Menu Structure

6

7

7

4 Calibrating for Level Measurement 8

4.1 Basic Calibration at the FEC 12

Electronic Insert

4.2 Basic Settings using the HART

Communicator DXR 275

4.3 Extended Calibration using the

HART Communicator 275

8

11

12

5 Entries for the Measuring Point . 14

5.1 Locking/Unlocking Parameters

5.2 Tag Number

14

14

6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting . 15

6.1 Alarms

6.2 Simulation

6.3 Description of Fault Responses,

15

15

Error Messages 17

6.4 Replacing the FEC 12 Electronic Insert 17

6.5 Transmitting Basic Settings

6.6 Transmitting All Settings

17

18

In addition to these operating instructions, the following documentation is also available on the use of the FEC 12 electronic insert:

•

Technical Information TI 242F/00/e: Multicap Probes DC ... E

•

Technical Information TI 243F/00/e: Multicap Probes DC ... A

•

Technical Information TI 240F/00/e: Multicap Probes DC ... T

•

Operating instructions for the HART handheld terminal DXR 275

Endress+Hauser

Supplementary documentation

1

2

Notes on Safety Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART)

Notes on Safety

Approved usage

Use in hazardous areas

Installation, commissioning and operation

The electronic insert FEC 12 may be used for level measurement in connection with capacitive Multicap probes only. It has been designed to operate safely in accordance with current technical and safety standards and must be installed by qualified personnel according to the instructions in this manual.

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility for any damage arising from incorrect use, installation or operation of the equipment. Changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved in the operating instructions or by the bodies responsible for compliance may make the user’s authority to use the equipment null and void. Damaged instruments which may be a safety hazard must not be operated and are to be marked as defective.

When used in explosion hazardous areas, the equipment must be installed in accordance with local regulations as well as with the technical and safety requirements on the measuring point as specified in the accompanying certificate.

Installation, electrical connection, commissioning, operation and maintenance may be carried out by trained and authorised personnel only. The operating instructions must have read and understand before the equipment is installed: instructions are to be followed exactly.

Safety Conventions

In order to highlight safety-relevant procedures in the manual, the following conventions have been used, each indicated by a corresponding icon in the margin.

Note!

A note highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may indirectly affect operation or may lead to an instrument response which is not planned.

Note!

Caution!

Caution!

A caution indicates actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may lead to personal injury or incorrect function of the instrument.

Warning!

A warning indicates actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may lead to personal injury, a safety hazard or destruction of the instrument.

Warning!

Endress+Hauser

Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART) 1 Introduction

1 Introduction

1.1 Application

The FEC 12 electronic insert is a transmitter for capacitive level measurement. It converts changes in capacitance resulting from changes in level into a capacitance-proportional impressed current. In vessels with a uniform cross section, the level or quantity (volume) can be thus displayed as a percentage of full level or, if a handheld terminal is used, in technical units. A pre-stored linearisation program also allows volumes to be measured in horizontal cylinders.

The FEC 12 electronic insert is installed in the housing of the Multicap probe. It can be used for applications in explosion hazardous areas.

Versions with corresponding features

Two versions of the FEC 12 electronic insert are available:

•

With HART protocol to be used with the Universal HART Communicator (described in these operating instructions) and

•

With INTENSOR protocol to be used with the Commulog VU 260 Z (see operating instructions BA 149F/00/e).

The version with the INTENSOR protocol can also be used for communication with the Silometer FMX 770.

•

Analogue output signal: standard 4...20 mA current.

•

Easy on-site settings: Settings "empty calibration" (= 4 mA) and "full calibration"

(= 20 mA) using pushbuttons on the electronic insert.

•

Operates with a linear characteristic as well as with a stored linearisation curve for horizontal cylinders.

•

The adjustable integration time ensures stable measured values even with agitated materials.

Versions

Features

1.2 Measuring System

The measuring system consists of a capacitive Multicap level probe and an

FEC 12 electronic insert. A DC power supply is also required. The two-wire power cable is also used for signal transmission, and delivers a 4...20 mA signal with a superimposed bidirectional digital signal conforming to the HART protocol. The superimposed signal has no influence on the follow-up instrumentation.

4...20 mA with digital signal e.g. display e.g. plotter

Multicap probe

DC power supply or

PLC

1.3 Operating Principle

Capacitive measurement functions as follows: the probe and vessel wall form a capacitor. Depending on the level, the space between these "capacitor plates" is filled either with air (empty vessel) or an unspecified quantity of material. The initial capacitance for the empty vessel is low but increases proportionally to the amount of material covering the probe.

Fig. 2

Measuring system: the electronic insert is used in a

Multicap probe for capacitive measurement.

Endress+Hauser 3

4

2 Installation Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART)

Fig. 3

Connecting the

FEC 12 electronic insert to the power supply

2 Installation

This section describes the electrical connection of the electronic insert. See Section 6 for instructions on replacing the electronic insert.

2.1 Electrical Connection

FEC 12

✔

✔

1

1 2

3 4 5

- + transmitter power supply unit

Insert the power cable through the cable entry on the probe housing. Unscreened or general purpose multi-core cable can be used as the connecting cable. If strong electromagnetic interference occurs due to, e.g. machinery or radios, then screened cable, grounded at the probe end, should be used. Connect the screening to the ground terminal on the probe housing.

The power cable is connected to

Terminals 1 - and 2 + of the electronic insert. The electronic insert has built-in polarity protection. The black ground wire in the probe is always connected to

Terminal 3.

Warning!

Note!

Fig. 4

Connecting the handheld terminal to the load or power cable

Warning!

•

When using the probe in explosion-hazardous areas, ensure that the type and routing of the intrinsically safe power and signal line is in accordance with the certificate and local regulations.

•

See the certificate of conformity for maximum permissible values for capacitance and inductance.

Note!

After connection, ensure that the cover is screwed down securely and that the cable gland of the probe housing is screwed tight.

Field Control room min 230

Ω

FEC 12

✔

✔

1

1 2

3 4 5

4...20 mA

I

O

I

O

Not permitted with protection

Ex d

EX EX follow-up units or e.g.

communications resistor

I

O min

230

Ω

Endress+Hauser

Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART) 2 Installation

A load should be connected into the power cable when connecting a handheld terminal. The handheld terminal can now be connected at any point along the power cable for communication with the electronic insert. The size of the load is given in the following table.

Load for handheld terminal

FEC 12 electronic insert

Version HART

Without communication

Load resistance minimum

230

Ω

0

Ω

Maximum cable length: 1000 m.

Maximum capacitance for screened cabling: 100 nF.

Load resistance maximum (U

B

=30V)

720

Ω

720

Ω

2.2 Technical Data protective cover

49

Fig. 5

Construction and dimensions of the FEC 12 electronic insert

Weight : approx. 170 g

Housing: plastic, potted electronics,

Colour: light grey RAL 7035, protection to DIN 40050: IP 20

Interlock diode with jumper: 13.0 V ... 30 V,

With Interlock diode: 13.8 V ... 30 V for Ex d with Zener diode module: 13.8 V ... 30 V

Permissible superimposed AC voltage (50 Hz ... 400 Hz): 100 mV pp

Without communication: 3 % of power supply voltage,

No understepping of minimum voltage!

Integrated polarity protection

Current consumption 3.8 ... 22 mA

Load for HART: 230 ... 720

Ω,

Without communication: 0 ... 720

Ω

Initial capacitance (‘offset’) for empty vessel

(probe free): 0 pF ... 350 pF

Change in capacitance (‘span’) for full vessel

(probe covered): 10 pF ... 2000 pF

Total capacitance resulting from initial capacitance plus change in capacitance: maximum 2000 pF

Output signal: superimposed direct current for initial capacitance: 4 mA for total capacitance: 20 mA

Resolution: 14

µ

A

Alarm signal for error indication (can be switched off):

22 mA

±

0.1 mA, to NAMUR

Adjustable time constant: 0 ... 40 s

Factory set: 1 s

Output current from power supply voltage: smaller than 0.05 % / V of full scale value at 24 V

Output current from load: smaller than 0.1 % / 100

Ω

of full scale value at 24 V

Type of signal: quasi-sine curve superposed on measuring current without DC component

With Interlock diode: for ammeter

According to DIN 40040, HOE, condensation not permitted

Permitted ambient temperature:

Nominal operating range: 0 ... +70 °C

Limiting operating range: -20 ... +80 °C

Storage temperature: -40 ... +85 °C

Protection against electrostatic build-up: up to 15 kV

RFI immunity (depending on type of housing): up to 10 V/m

Electromagnetic Compatibility:

Interference Emission to EN 61326; Electrical Equipment Class B

Interference Immunity to EN 61326; Annex A (Industrial) and

NAMUR Recommendation EMC (NE 21)

Endress+Hauser

Construction

Power Supply

Load

Capacitance Ranges

Analogue Output

Output damping

Accuracy

Communication Interface

Additional Signal Output

Environmental Conditions

5

3 Operating Elements Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART)

Fig. 6

Operating elements on the

FEC 12 electronic insert

3 Operating Elements

This Section describes the operating elements of the electronic insert. It also describes the menu structure of the HART protocol used with the Universal HART

Communicator DXR 275.

3.1 FEC 12 Electronic Insert

The operating elements of the electronic insert are protected by a cover. This can be raised by inserting a small screwdriver into a slit at the edge. The inside of the cover has symbols printed on it that serve as a quick operating manual.

lid with short instructions switch for selecting local or remote linearisation pushbuttons, e.g. for empty calibration switch for the type of linearisation pushbuttons, e.g. for full calibration

Switches

Pushbuttons

6

FEC 12 green LED: indicates successful calibration

✔

✔

1 2

4...20 mA

3 4 5 connection for ammeter

The lefthand switch selects whether the linearisation is to be carried out remotely with the handheld terminal or locally with the FEC 12 operating elements. If linearisation at the FEC 12 is required, then one of two stored linearisation modes in the electronic insert is activated (vertical vessel with linear characteristics or horizontal cylinder) at the righthand switch.

Calibration, locking and reset to factory-set values are carried out at the FEC 12 by using the four pushbuttons (see Section 4).

Basic Operation:

The pushbuttons marked with (+) increase current and those marked (-) decrease current. Punching the pushbuttons produces a step-wise change. The smallest resolution possible is 0.014 mA. If the pushbutton is pressed continuously, then the current also changes continuously until the pushbutton is released. The change begins slowly and gradually increases in speed and so quickly passes through a wide range. Just before reaching the value required, the pushbutton should be released and the procedure completed by punching the pushbutton for fine resolution. If the value required is overrun, then correct for it by pressing the pushbutton for the other direction.

Endress+Hauser

Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART) 3 Operating Elements

3.2 HART Communicator DXR 275

When the lefthand switch is set to remote linearisation (arrow symbol), the FEC 12 electronic insert can be calibrated using the HART Communicator handheld terminal.

The terminal communicates with the electronic insert over the power/signal cable. The operating manual for the HART Communicator describes its operation. Some knowledge of operating the HART Communicator is assumed for the following section.

Note!

When calibrating the FEC 12 electronic insert, the following sections will assume the operating steps given below. They apply to all instructions and will, therefore, no longer be given in this manual:

•

First step: Move from the "MATRIX GROUP SEL." menu to the next higher menu with the

→ arrow key.

•

Last step: Return to the "Online" menu with F3 [HOME].

3.3 HART Menu Structure

All parameters of the FEC 12 can be addressed by the menu structure using the handheld terminal. The following diagram shows the menu structure of the HART protocol for the FEC 12 electronic insert. Each field in the menu structure can be selected using the arrow or numeric keys on the handheld terminal.

Note!

From "Online" menu«

Fig. 7

Menu structure for the HART

Communicator handheld terminal

1

CALIBRATION

1 MEASURED VALUE

2 EMPTY CALIBRATION

3 FULL CALIBRATION

4 MIN: CURRENT 4 mA

5 OUTPUT DAMPING

6 VALUE FOR 4 mA

7 VALUE FOR 20 mA

8 SAFETY ALARM

9 CAPACITANCE

CURRENT

HOME

2

EXTENDED CAL.

1 LINEARISATION

2 OFFSET

3 SENSITIVITY

4 TEMPERATURE UNIT

5 MEASURED TEMPERATURE

6 MIN. TEMPERATURE

7 MAX. TEMPERATURE

8 SECURITY LOCKING

HOME

MATRIX GROUP SEL.

1 CALIBRATION

2 EXTENDED CAL.

3 SERVICE/SIMULATION

4 USER INFORMATION

HOME

3

SERVICE/SIMULATION

1 DIAGNOSTIC CODE

2 LAST DIAGNOSTIC

3 SOFTWARE NO.

4 DEFAULT VALUES

5 SIMULATION

6 SIM. LEVEL

7 SIM. VOLUME

8 SIM. CURRENT

HOME

4

USER INFORMATION

1 SET TAG NUMBER

2 SERIAL NUMBER

3 MEASURING RANGE

4 C AT EMPTY CAL.

5 C AT FULL CAL.

6 SELECT UNIT

7 OFFSET OF DEVICE

8 SENSIT. OF DEVICE

HOME

Endress+Hauser 7

8

4 Calibrating Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART)

Note!

4 Calibrating

This section deals with the basic settings necessary for the electronic insert to convert capacitance values into correct data on level or volume, which can then be shown on a display unit (e.g. meter or handheld terminal).

The electronic insert can carry out basic settings in two ways:

•

On site at the electronic insert itself or

•

On the handheld terminal.

The initial basic settings can also be carried out locally at the electronic insert and then later with the handheld terminal for, e.g. setting the type of linearisation

(Note: the electronic insert must not be locked).

Note!

•

After completing calibration the matrix should then be locked (see Section 5.1).

After locking, all entries can be called up and displayed but no longer changed.

•

The values entered can be written in the table below so that the identical values can again be entered if the electronic insert is replaced. A complete recalibration is not then required (see also Section 6).

Note!

Reset (recall of factory settings)

4.1 Basic Calibration at the FEC 12 Electronic Insert

The following entries are required for basic calibration of the electronic insert:

•

Type of linearisation

•

Empty calibration

•

Full calibration

Note!

•

If an initial calibration is not to be carried out, but instead a recalibration of the system, then a reset the electronic insert first.

•

This also applies when it is not clear if the electronic insert is calibrated with factory settings (see following section). Unwanted settings may result and lead to incorrect measured values.

Press the pushbuttons for empty calibration (-) and for full calibration (-) simultaneously for approx. 5 s. This produces the following factory settings:

Significance

Empty calibration [%]

Full calibration [%]

Min. current 4 mA

Output damping [s]

Value for 4 mA [%]

Value for 20 mA [%]

Safety alarm

Linearisation

Offset [pF]

Sensitivity [pF/%]

Set tag number

Select unit

Factory settings Entered values

0.0

100.0

off

1

0.0

100.0

max (110 %) linear

349.90

16.49

’--------’

%

Endress+Hauser

Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART) 4 Calibrating

Two types of linearisation can be selected:

•

Vessel characteristics as linear

•

Vessel characteristics as a horizontal cylinder

Use the lefthand switch to select whether linearisation is to be carried out at the electronic insert or by the handheld terminal. If the switch is moved to the right, then linearisation is carried out at the electronic insert. The handheld terminal cannot now change the setting. If the switch is moved to the left, then linearisation must be carried out with the handheld terminal and the switch on the right remains inactive.

Select the type of linearisation for local calibration using the righthand switch. When it is moved to the left, then the level (output current) is proportional to volume, i.e. the cross-section of the vessel should be constant over its entire length. When it is moved to the right, then linearisation is set for a horizontal cylinder, and the measured value supplied corresponds directly to a percent of full volume.

Selecting linearisation

Empty calibration With the vessel empty (0 %) both pushbuttons on the left (-) and (+) are pressed simultaneously in order to set the signal current to the 4 mA lower value. The green

LED lights up to acknowledge that the setting has been accepted. Only when the green LED goes out is the correct current value of 4 mA shown on the ammeter.

With the vessel full (100 %) both pushbuttons on the right (-) and (+) are pressed simultaneously in order to set the signal current to the 20 mA upper value. The green

LED lights up to acknowledge that the setting has been accepted. Only when the green LED goes out is the correct value of 20 mA shown on the ammeter.

Full calibration

In this case, the level of product in the vessel must be known as accurately as possible and should not be too high. A level which is too high reduces the accuracy of the zero point (corresponding to an empty vessel). An ammeter must be connected to the electronic insert at Terminals 4 - 5.

Assuming that the level is at 15 %, the current value corresponding to a 15% level must now be determined. The lower current value can be varied by pressing the two pushbuttons on the left. The following calculation is used:

➀ The lower current value (= empty vessel, 0 %) is 4 mA.

➁ The upper current value (= full vessel, 100 %) is 20 mA.

➂ This gives a measuring range (‘span’) of 16 mA for a change from 0 to 100 % or a

0.16 mA increase in current for every 1 % rise in level.

➃ For a 15 % level, this is 15 % x 0.16 mA/% or 2.4 mA. This must be added to the

4 mA to give the current value required:

2.4 mA + 4 mA = 6.4 mA

➄ The value 6.4 mA (check with the ammeter) is set by pressing the two pushbuttons on the left. Pressing pushbutton (+) increases the current and pressing pushbutton

(-) decreases the current.

Note!

•

No indication is given on the green LED when using this procedure.

•

If the operating status is unclear due to an incorrect setting, then all settings should be reset to factory-set values and the basic calibration carried out again.

Alternative procedure: calibration with the vessel almost empty

Note!

Endress+Hauser 9


Alternative procedure: calibration with the vessel almost full

Note!

The level of the vessel must be known as accurately as possible and should be as high as possible. A level which is too low reduces the accuracy of the upper point

(corresponding to a full vessel). An ammeter must be connected to the electronic insert at Terminals 4 - 5.

Assuming that the level is at 90 %, the current value corresponding to a 90 % level must now be determined. The upper current value can be varied by pressing the two pushbuttons on the right. The following calculation is used:

➀ The lower current value (= empty vessel, 0 %) is 4 mA.

➁ The upper current value (= full vessel, 100 %) is 20 mA.

➂ This gives a measuring range (‘span’) of 16 mA for a change from 0 to 100 % or a 0.16 mA increase in current for every 1 % rise in level.

➃ For a 90 % level this is 90 % x 0.16 mA/% or 14.4 mA. This must be added to the

4 mA to give the current value required:

14.4 mA + 4 mA = 18.4 mA

(The upper current value can also be used and

10 % x 0.16 mA/% = 1.6 mA is to be subtracted from 20 mA)

➄ The value 18.4 mA (check with the ammeter) is set by pressing the two pushbuttons on the right. Pressing pushbutton (+) increases the current and pressing pushbutton (-) decreases the current.

Note!

•

No indication is given on the green LED when using this variation.

•

If the operating status is unclear due to an incorrect setting, then all settings should be reset to factory-set values and the basic calibration carried out again.

Locking the parameters

Unlocking the parameters

Press simultaneously the pushbutton for empty calibration (+) and the pushbutton for full calibration (-). The settings of the electronic insert can now be called up at any time using the handheld terminal but not changed. This condition is indicated in the handheld terminal by the appearence of the code 9999 in Menu Level 2 "EXTENDED

CALIBRATION" , Field 8 "SECURITY LOCKING" (see Section 5).

Press simultaneously the pushbutton for empty calibration (-) and the pushbutton for full calibration (+). All settings of the electronic insert can now be called up and changed using the handheld terminal. This condition is indicated in the handheld terminal by the appearence of the code 12 in Menu Level 2 "EXTENDED CALIBRATION" ,

Field 8 " SECURITY LOCKING " (see Section 5).

10 Endress+Hauser


4.2 Basic Settings using the HART Communicator DXR 275

The FEC 12 allows calibration in % only. A remote calibration from the handheld allows, e.g. technical units to be displayed. If a recalibration is to be carried out, then a reset should be done first. The parameters of the electronic insert must not be locked, see above!

Note!

When calibrating the FEC 12 electronic insert, the following sections will assume the operating steps given below. They apply to all instructions and will, therefore, no longer be given in this manual:

•

First step: Move from the "MATRIX GROUP SEL." menu to the next higher menu with the

→

arrow key.

•

Last step: Return to the "Online" menu with F3 [HOME].

Step Entry

1 3

Cursor in display at

SERVICE/SIMULATION

2 4 DEFAULT VALUES

3 12 12

5 F2 [SEND]

Significance

Code number for reset

Confirms entry

Value to be transmitted

The factory settings given on reset are shown in the following table:

1; 7

1; 8

2; 1

2; 2

2; 3

4; 1

4; 6

Menu field

1; 2

1; 3

1; 4

1; 5

1; 6

Significance

EMPTY CALIBRATION [%]

FULL CALIBRATION [%]

MIN. CURRENT 4 mA

OUTPUT DAMPING [s]

VALUE FOR 4 mA [%]

VALUE FOR 20 mA [%]

SAFETY ALARM

LINEARISATION

OFFSET [pF]

SENSITIVITY[pF/%]

SET TAG NUMBER

SELECT UNIT

Factory setting

0.0

100.0

OFF

1

0.0

100.0

MAX (110 %)

LINEAR

349.90

16.49

’--------’

%

Values entered

Note!

Reset (factory settings)

Endress+Hauser 11


Selecting linearisation Two vessel characteristics are available: linear or horizontal cylinder

Note!

•

The switch on the left on the FEC 12 electronic insert must be moved to the left so that linearisation can be carried out remotely with the handheld terminal.

3

4

Step Entry

1 2

2 1

F4 [ENTER]


EXTENDED CALIBRATION

LINEARISATION e.g. LINEAR

HORIZ. CYL.

Significance

Extended calibration

Selecting linearisation

Level is proportional to volume, i.e. the cross-section of the vessel remains constant over the entire distance

Horizontal cylinder : the measured value directly corresponding to volume

Confirms entry, value to be transmitted

Empty and full calibration

4 mA threshold

Note!

Step Entry Cursor in display at

1 1 CALIBRATION

2 2 EMPTY CALIBRATION

3 0.0 0.0

4

5

F4 [ENTER]

3

6 100.0

FULL CALIBRATION

100.0

7 F4 [ENTER]

Significance

Basic calibration

Empty calibration

Vessel is empty, a 4 mA signal is output at the entered level or volume


Full calibration

Vessel is full, a 20 mA signal is output at the entered level or volume

Confirms entry, value is transmitted

Note!

•

You can also calibrate in technical units, see also 4 mA/20 mA value, p 13. In this case, if a horizontal cylinder is selected, the entries must be made in volume units!

4.3 Extended Calibration using the HART Communicator 275

The factory settings allow a current range from 3.8 mA to 20 mA and larger. Since a current less than 4 mA could result in unwanted responses by process control systems, it is possible to set a threshold of 4 mA on the current output, below which it cannot fall.

Step Entry

1 1

2 4

3


CALIBRATION

MIN. CURRENT 4 mA

ON

OFF

Significance

Basic calibration

Current output at minimum 4 mA

Threshold is at 4.0 mA

Current range begins at 3.8 mA


Note!

•

At factory setting the 4 mA threshold is switched off

Note!

12 Endress+Hauser


The output damping is set in the factory at 1 s and affects the speed at which the current output responds to a change in level. When there is a sudden jump from empty to full in the vessel, after 1 s the current display reaches 63% or 14.08 mA of the set point (1*output damping). After 5 s (5*output damping) it reaches 99 % or

19.84 mA. If a larger output damping is set, then these display times are correspondingly longer.

The output damping can be selected between the range 0 and 40 s. For liquids, the turbulence can cause the display to be unstable. Increasing the output damping with the handheld terminal cancels this effect.

Output damping

Step Entry Cursor in display at

1 1 CALIBRATION

2 5 OUTPUT DAMPING

1 s

2 3 e.g. 2

4 F4 [ENTER]

5 F2 [SEND]

Significance

Basic setting

Setting the output damping

(Factory setting 1 s)

Sets the output damping to 2 s

Confirms entry

Value is transmitted

If another value instead of 0 (= empty vessel) is to be displayed, then the value can be entered here. The units are changed from % in the " SELECT UNIT " menu.

Step Entry

1 1

2

3

6


CALIBRATION

VALUE FOR 4 mA e.g. 20.0 20.0

4 F4 [ENTER]

5 F2 [SEND]

Significance

Basic setting

Value for 4 mA

Value is displayed if the current value is 4 mA

Confirms entry


Value for 4 mA

If another value instead of 100 (= full vessel) is to be displayed, then the value can be entered here. The units are changed from % in the " SELECT UNIT" menu (see below).

Value for 20 mA

Step Entry

1 1

2

3

7

Cursor in Display at

CALIBRATION

VALUE FOR 20 mA e.g. 80.0 80.0

4 F4 [ENTER]

5 F2 [SEND]

Significance

Basic setting

Value for 20 mA

Value is displayed, if the current value is 20 mA

Confirms entry


Instead of giving the results in %, the following units may be selected:

Level:

Volume:

Weight: cm l ton dm hl kg m t cm3 inch dm3 lb.

ft m3 ft3 us_gal i_gal

Selecting units

Step Entry

1 4

2 6

3


USER INFORMATION

SELECT UNIT

%

e.g.10x

m3

5 F2 [SEND]

Significance

User information

Select units

Factory setting

Volume display in m3

Confirms entry


Endress+Hauser 13

5 Entries for the Measuring Point

Locking

Unlocking


5 Entries for the Measuring Point

5.1 Locking/Unlocking Parameters

The parameters can be locked from the handheld terminal by entering a code number between 1 and 11 or between 13 and 9998: all settings in the electronic insert are protected from being altered. If the code number 9999 is shown in the display, then locking has been activated at the electronic insert by pushbutton.

Step Entry Cursor in Display at

1 2 EXTENDED CALIBRATION

2 8 SECURITY LOCKING

3 e.g. 35

4 F4 [ENTER]

12

35

Significance


Locking

No locking activated

Selected code number for locking

Confirms entry, valueis transmitted

With the exception of " SECURITY LOCKING" all fields can be viewed but not changed..

Locking can be again cancelled by entering the code number 12. This does not apply if the locking was activated at the electronic insert. This is indicated by the code number 9999 in the menu field.


1 2 EXTENDED CALIBRATION

2 8 e.g. 35

3 12

4 F4 [ENTER]

SECURITY LOCKING

35

12

Significance


Locking

Selected code number for locking

Code number for unlocking


5.2 Tag Number

A measuring point number ( "SET TAG NUMBER" ) can be assigned to the electronic insert by using the handheld terminal. This consists of 8 ASCII characters. This measuring point tag serves to identify different electronic inserts connected to the same power line as every electronic insert has to have its own unique tag number.

2

3


1 4 USER INFORMATION

1 SET TAG NUMBER e.g. LIC10 LIC10

4 F4 [ENTER]

Significance

User information

Locking

Enter up to 8 characters


14 Endress+Hauser

Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART) 6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

6.1 Alarms

The following response is set in the factory:

If the FEC 12 detects a fault, then the current output is set to 22 mA (=110 %) to enable process control systems to, e.g. assume a response.

If no alarm indication is to be given on an alarm, then " CONTINUE" can be set. In this case the FEC 12 continues to measure although the measured value is possibly incorrect.

Step

2

Entry

1 1

8

3

4 F4

[ENTER]

5 F2

[SEND]

Cursor in Display to

CALIBRATION

SAFETY ALARM

MAX (110%)

CONTINUE

Significance

Basic setting

Output on alarm

Output jumps to 22 mA (=110 %), factory set

Continue measuring, no alarm indication

Confirms entry


Output on alarm

Alarm indication

6.2 Simulation

Simulation enables the current value coming from the electronic insert to be simulated. It can be used for checking the correct processing of probe signals, e.g. in a process control system. Simulation may also be necessary for tracing faults. No change in level is required to produce a different current value. The various types of simulation

•

Level ( LEVEL)

•

Volume ( VOLUME)

•

Current ( CURRENT) are independent from one another and therefore none affects the others.

Note!

•

If simulation is activated, Warning E 613 is displayed to indicate this.

•

The full simulation range is only available with a free probe, only a limited range is possible with a covered probe.

•

On completion, switch off simulation again in order to continue normal measurement.

Activate simulation as follows:

Note!

Simulation


1 3 SERVICE/SIMULATION

2 5 SIMULATION

3

OFF

ON

Significance

Service/Simulation

Simulation

Simulation switched off

Simulation switched on


Endress+Hauser 15

6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART)

Simulation for level

Simulation for volume

Enter the level value to be simulated. The appropriate current is given by the electronic insert.



2 6 SIM. LEVEL

3

4 F4 [ENTER] e.g. 77.06

e.g. 35.00

35.00

Significance

Service/Simulation

Simulation for level

Actual measured value is displayed

Level to be simulated is entered


Enter the volume value to be simulated. The appropriate current is given by the electronic insert.

Step Entry Cursor in Display to


2 7 SIM. VOLUME

3

4 F4 [ENTER] e.g. 77.06

e.g. 5.00

5.00

Significance

Service/Simulation

Simulation of volume


Volume to be simulated is entered


Simulation for current Enter directly the current value to be simulated.



2 7 SIM. CURRENT

3

4 F4 [ENTER] e.g. 17.02

e.g. 8.00

8.00

Significance

Service/Simulation

Simulation of current output


Current to be simulated is entered


Note!

Note!

The values entered during simulation are stored until simulation is again switched off.

16 Endress+Hauser


6.3 Description of Fault Responses, Error Messages

Error code

103

106

116

204

613

615

616

617

618

620

Significance

Initialisation activated

Check sum error

This appears during the download, and remians if the download is not completed correctly. A new and successful download or reset deletes the error message.

Error in download format

Measuring capacitance too large (larger than 2000 pF)

Simulation switched on

The actual calibration at 4 mA produces an initial capacitance larger than 350 pF. It cannot be altered further.

A reset deletes the error message.

The actual calibration at 20 mA produces a total capacitance larger than 2000 pF. It cannot be altered further.


The actual calibration produces a difference in capacitance (’span’) of less than

10 pF between initial and total capacitance. It cannot be altered further.


Process-specific sensitivity too large

The current lies outside the permitted range (4.0 ... 20 mA or

3.8 ... 20 mA). It has no relationship to the measured value.

6.4 Replacing the FEC 12 Electronic Insert

Note!

If you want to transmit the settings of the old electronic insert into a new electronic insert, then please note the following section.

•

Disconnect the power supply cable from the old electronic insert

•

Loosen the central mounting screw

•

Remove the electronic insert

•

Plug in the new electronic insert

•

Screw down the central mounting screw securely

•

Connect the power cable to the electronic insert

Note!

Removal

Insertion

6.5 Transmitting Basic Settings

The recalibration procedure can be dispensed when replacing an electronic insert.

Call up the setting for offset and sensitivity using the handheld terminal, replace the electronic insert, and then enter both settings in the new electronic insert.

The offset value indicates zero point calibration and is given as the capacitance value

(initial capacitance). The value for sensitivity is the difference between the initial and total capacitance (’span’) divided by 100.

Calling up offset and sensitivity

Endress+Hauser 17

6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting Electronic insert FEC 12 (HART)

Calling up offset and sensitivity (cont.) Step Entry

1 2

2 2

3 F3 [ESC]

4 3

5 F3 [ESC]

Cursor in Display to

EXTENDED CALIBRATION

OFFSET e.g. 63.43

OFFSET

SENSITIVITY e.g. 2.02

SENSITIVITY

Significance


Offset of electronic insert

Record value for offset

Sensitivity of electronic insert

Record value for sensitivity

Entering offset and sensitivity

5

6

Step Entry Cursor in Display to

1 2 EXTEND. CALIBRATION

2

3

4 3

2

63.43

OFFSET

63.43

F4 [ENTER] OFFSET

SENSITIVITY

2.02

2.02

F4 [ENTER] SENSITIVITY

F2 [SEND]

Significance


Offset

Enter recorded value for offset

Confirms entry

Sensitivity

Enter recorded value for sensitivity

Confirms entry


All settings can be transmitted from one electronic insert to another. Please see following section.

6.6 Transmitting All Settings

All settings stored in an electronic insert can be transmitted to another electronic insert using the HART Communicator handheld terminal. The procedure begins with an upload with the data from the old FEC 12 to the handheld terminal. Once the upload has been completed, a download is is made and all data are transmitted from the handheld terminal to the new FEC 12.

Upload

(loading data into the handheld terminal)

0 MATRIX GROUP SEL.

1 Online

2 3 Transfer

Device to Memory

3 1

Looking for a device

Save data from device to configuration memory

4 F3 [SAVE] Overwrite existing

5 F1 [YES] configuration memory

Device to Memory

Higher menu level

Data transfer

Upload: Loading data into the memory of the handheld terminal

Looking for an electronic insert

Ready for receiving data

Prompts confirmation

Data of the electronic insert now in memory of handheld terminal

Data loaded into the

HART Communicator

1 Set Tag Number

2 Select Unit

3 Output Damping

4 Safety Alarm

5 Min Current 4 mA

6 Value for 4 mA

7 Value for 20 mA

8 Linearisation

9 Offset

10 Sensitivity

11 Temperature Unit

12 Descriptor

13 Message

14 Date

15 Poll addr

18 Endress+Hauser


You must first move to the "Offline Configure" menu before carrying out a download.

1

2

3

4

Step

0

Entry

1

2

1

1

Display

MATRIX GROUP SEL.

Online

Offline

Offline Configure

New Device or

Last Device

Significance

The data you wish to be transmit to another electronic insert can be collected in this menu.

1 New Device

→

2 Last Device

→

This option enables a new electronic insert to be calibrated.

This option enables variables to be edited and changed after an upload.

There are four function keys within this menu:

HELP (F1) -

SEND (F2) -

EDIT (F3) -

SKIP (F4) -

Online help. Help describes the variable shown in the display

Marks the variable in the display for the download and then marks the next variable.

The variable can be edited and is marked for download once

RETURN (F4) is pressed.

The variable is skipped (not marked for download). The next variable is then marked.

The "Offline" menu is displayed after the last variable. The parameters are now stored in the HART Communicator and are ready for a download into an electronic insert.

After marking has been carried out, downloads can be carried out without first marking the variables again.

Download

Download

(loading data into the electronic insert) 0 MATRIX GROUP SEL.

1 Online

2 3 Transfer

3 2

Device to Memory

Memory to Device


Download data from configuration memory to device

4 F3 [SEND] Sending data to device

Main menu level

Data transfer

Download:

Loading data into electronic insert


Ready for data transmission

Data now stored in electronic insert

Endress+Hauser 19

Europe

Austria

❑ Endress+Hauser Ges.m.b.H.

Wien

Tel. (01) 8 80 56-0, Fax (01) 8 80 56-35

Belarus

Belorgsintez

Minsk

Tel. (01 72) 508473, Fax (01 72) 508583

Belgium / Luxemburg

❑ Endress+Hauser N.V.

Brussels

Tel. (02) 2 48 06 00, Fax (02) 2 48 05 53

Bulgaria

INTERTECH-AUTOMATION

Sofia

Tel. (02) 66 48 69, Fax (02) 9 63 13 89

Croatia


Zagreb

Tel. (01) 6 63 77 85, Fax (01) 6 63 78 23

Cyprus

I+G Electrical Services Co. Ltd.

Nicosia

Tel. (02) 48 47 88, Fax (02) 48 46 90

Czech Republic


Praha

Tel. (0 26) 6 78 42 00, Fax (0 26) 6 78 41 79

Denmark


Søborg

Tel. (70) 13 11 32, Fax (70) 13 21 33

Estonia

ELVI-Aqua

Tartu

Tel. (7) 44 16 38, Fax (7) 44 15 82

Finland

❑ Endress+Hauser Oy

Espoo

Tel. (09) 8 67 67 40, Fax (09) 86 76 74 40

France


Huningue

Tel. (3 89) 69 67 68, Fax (3 89) 69 48 02

Germany

❑ Endress+Hauser Messtechnik GmbH+Co.

Weil am Rhein

Tel. (0 76 21) 9 75-01, Fax (0 76 21) 9 75-5 55

Great Britain


Manchester

Tel. (01 61) 2 86 50 00, Fax (01 61) 9 98 18 41

Greece

I & G Building Services Automation S.A.

Athens

Tel. (01) 9 24 15 00, Fax (01) 9 22 17 14

Hungary

Mile Ipari-Elektro

Budapest

Tel. (01) 2 61 55 35, Fax (01) 2 61 55 35

Iceland

BIL ehf

Reykjavik

Tel. (05) 61 96 16, Fax (05) 61 96 17

Ireland

Flomeaco Company Ltd.

Kildare

Tel. (0 45) 86 86 15, Fax (0 45) 86 81 82

Italy

❑ Endress+Hauser S.p.A.

Cernusco s/N Milano

Tel. (02) 92192-1, Fax (02) 92192-362

Latvia

Rino TK

Riga

Tel. (07) 31 5087, Fax (07) 31 5084

Lithuania

UAB "Agava"

Kaunas

Tel. (07) 20 24 10, Fax (07) 20 74 14

Netherlands

❑ Endress+Hauser B.V.

Naarden

Tel. (0 35) 6 95 86 11, Fax (0 35) 6 95 88 25

Norway


Tranby

Tel. (0 32) 85 98 50, Fax (0 32) 85 98 51

Poland

Endress+Hauser Polska Sp. z o.o.

Warszawy

Tel. (0 22) 7 20 10 90, Fax (0 22) 7 20 10 85

Portugal

Tecnisis - Tecnica de Sistemas Industriais

Linda-a-Velha

Tel. (21) 4267290, Fax (21) 4267299

Romania

Romconseng S.R.L.

Bucharest

Tel. (01) 4 10 16 34, Fax (01) 4 11 2 5 0 1

Russia

Endress+Hauser Moscow Office

Moscow

Tel. (0 95) 1 58 75 64, Fax (0 95) 1 58 98 71

Slovakia

Transcom Technik s.r.o.

Bratislava

Tel. (7) 44 88 86 84, Fax (7) 44 88 71 12

Slovenia

Endress+Hauser D.O.O.

Ljubljana

Tel. (01) 519 22 17, Fax (01) 519 22 98

Spain


Sant Just Desvern

Tel. (93) 4 80 33 66, Fax (93) 4 73 38 39

Sweden

❑ Endress+Hauser AB

Sollentuna

Tel. (08) 55 51 16 00, Fax (08) 55 51 16 55

Switzerland

❑ Endress+Hauser AG

Reinach/BL 1

Tel. (0 61) 7 15 75 75, Fax (0 61) 7 11 16 50

Turkey

Intek Endüstriyel Ölcü ve Kontrol Sistemleri

Istanbul

Tel. (02 12) 2 75 13 55, Fax (02 12) 2 66 27 75

Ukraine

Photonika GmbH

Kiev

Tel. (44) 2 68 81, Fax (44) 2 69 08

Yugoslavia Rep.

Meris d.o.o.

Beograd

Tel. (11) 4 44 19 66, Fax (11) 4 44 19 66

Africa

Egypt

Anasia

Heliopolis/Cairo

Tel. (02) 4 17 90 07, Fax (02) 4 17 90 08

Morocco

Oussama S.A.

Casablanca

Tel. (02) 24 13 38, Fax (02) 40 26 57

South Africa

❑ Endress+Hauser Pty. Ltd.

Sandton

Tel. (011) 2 62 80 00 Fax (011) 2 62 80 62

Tunisia

Controle, Maintenance et Regulation

Tunis

Tel. (01) 79 30 77, Fax (01) 78 85 95

America

Argentina

❑ Endress+Hauser Argentina S.A.

Buenos Aires

Tel. (01) 1 45 22 79 70, Fax (01) 1 45 22 79 09

Bolivia

Tritec S.R.L.

Cochabamba

Tel. (0 42) 5 69 93, Fax (0 42) 5 09 81

Brazil

❑ Samson Endress+Hauser Ltda.

Sao Paulo

Tel. (0 11) 50 31 34 55, Fax (0 11) 50 31 30 67

Canada


Burlington, Ontario

Tel. (9 05) 6 81 92 92, Fax (9 05) 6 81 94 44

Chile

❑ Endress+Hauser Chile Ltd.

Santiago

Tel. (02) 321-3009, Fax (02) 321-3025

Colombia

Colsein Ltda.

Bogota D.C.

Tel. (01) 2 36 76 59, Fax (01) 6 10 41 86

Costa Rica

EURO-TEC S.A.

San Jose

Tel. (02) 96 15 42, Fax (02) 96 15 42

Ecuador

Insetec Cia. Ltda.

Quito

Tel. (02) 26 91 48, Fax (02) 46 18 33

Guatemala

ACISA Automatizacion Y Control Industrial S.A.

Ciudad de Guatemala, C.A.

Tel. (03) 34 59 85, Fax (03) 32 74 31

Mexico

❑ Endress+Hauser S.A. de C.V.

Mexico City

Tel. (5) 5 68 24 05, Fax (5) 5 68 74 59

Paraguay

Incoel S.R.L.

Asuncion

Tel. (0 21) 21 39 89, Fax (0 21) 22 65 83

Uruguay

Circular S.A.

Montevideo

Tel. (02) 92 57 85, Fax (02) 92 91 51

USA

❑ Endress+Hauser Inc.

Greenwood, Indiana

Tel. (3 17) 5 35-71 38, Fax (3 17) 5 35-84 98

Venezuela

Controval C.A.

Caracas

Tel. (02) 9 44 09 66, Fax (02) 9 44 45 54

Asia

China

❑ Endress+Hauser Shanghai

Instrumentation Co. Ltd.

Shanghai

Tel. (0 21) 54 90 23 00, Fax (0 21) 54 90 23 03

❑ Endress+Hauser Beijing Office

Beijing

Tel. (0 10) 68 34 40 58, Fax (0 10) 68 34 40 68

Hong Kong

❑ Endress+Hauser HK Ltd.

Hong Kong

Tel. 25 28 31 20, Fax 28 65 41 71

India

❑ Endress+Hauser (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Mumbai

Tel. (0 22) 8 52 14 58, Fax (0 22) 8 52 19 27

Indonesia

PT Grama Bazita

Jakarta

Tel. (21) 7 97 50 83, Fax (21) 7 97 50 89

Japan

❑ Sakura Endress Co. Ltd.

Tokyo

Tel. (04 22) 54 06 13, Fax (04 22) 55 02 75

Malaysia

❑ Endress+Hauser (M) Sdn. Bhd.

Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan

Tel. (03) 7 33 48 48, Fax (03) 7 33 88 00

Pakistan

Speedy Automation

Karachi

Tel. (0 21) 7 72 29 53, Fax (0 21) 7 73 68 84

Philippines

❑ Endress+Hauser Philippines Inc.

= Metro Manila

Tel. (2) 3 72 36 01-05, Fax (2) 4 12 19 44

Singapore

❑ Endress+Hauser (S.E.A.) Pte., Ltd.

Singapore

Tel. 5 66 82 22, Fax 5 66 68 48

South Korea

❑ Endress+Hauser (Korea) Co., Ltd.

Seoul

Tel. (02) 6 58 72 00, Fax (02) 6 59 28 38

Taiwan

Kingjarl Corporation

Taipei R.O.C.

Tel. (02) 27 18 39 38, Fax (02) 27 13 41 90

Thailand


Bangkok

Tel. (2) 9 96 78 11-20, Fax (2) 9 96 78 10

Vietnam

Tan Viet Bao Co. Ltd.

Ho Chi Minh City

Tel. (08) 8 33 52 25, Fax (08) 8 33 52 27

Iran

PATSA Co.

Tehran

Tel. (0 21) 8 75 47 48, Fax(0 21) 8 74 77 61

Israel

Instrumetrics Industrial Control Ltd.

Netanya

Tel. (09) 8 35 70 90, Fax (09) 8 35 0619

Jordan

A.P. Parpas Engineering S.A.

Amman

Tel. (06) 4 64 32 46, Fax (06) 4 64 57 07

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Anasia Ind. Agencies

Jeddah

Tel. (02) 6 71 00 14, Fax (02) 6 72 59 29

Lebanon

Network Engineering

Jbeil

Tel. (3) 94 40 80, Fax (9) 54 80 38

Sultanate of Oman

Mustafa & Jawad Sience & Industry Co.

L.L.C.

Ruwi

Tel. 60 20 09, Fax 60 70 66

United Arab Emirates

Descon Trading EST.

Dubai

Tel. (04) 2 65 36 51, Fax (04) 2 65 32 64

Yemen

Yemen Company for Ghee and Soap Industry

Taiz

Tel. (04) 23 06 64, Fax (04) 21 23 38

Australia + New Zealand

Australia

ALSTOM Australia Limited

Milperra

Tel. (02) 97 74 74 44, Fax (02) 97 74 46 67

New Zealand

EMC Industrial Group Limited

Auckland

Tel. (09) 4 15 51 10, Fax (09) 4 15 51 15

All other countries


Instruments International

Weil am Rhein

Germany

Tel. (0 76 21) 9 75-02, Fax (0 76 21) 97 5-3 45 http://www.endress.com

Endress

+

Hauser


❑ Members of the Endress+Hauser group 12.97/MTM

BA 148F/00/en/07.95 (b)

016700-1000

CCS/CV4.2

016700- 1000

Rittal SK 3302.series Operating instructions

Recooling unit

Specification of the temperature controller MPR-SMK-x-xx-x

Industrial controller KS 40-1,

KS41-1 and KS42-1

Operating manual

English

9499-040-62711

BlueControl

More efficiency in engineering, more overview in operating:

The projecting environment for the BluePort controllers

Updates

Mini

ATTENTION!

Version www or

PMA-CD on

g

a

l

Technical data

Mounting

Electrical connections

2.1 Connecting diagram

90...250V

24V AC/DC

2.2 Terminal connection

Operation

3.1 Front view

0

!

3.2 Behaviour after power-on

3.3 Operating level

Extended operating level

Errorliste

3.4 Maintenance manager / Error list

3.5 Self-tuning

3.6 Manual tuning

Parameter adjustment effects

Formulas

3.7 Alarm handling

3.8 Operating structure

125

PArA

ConF

CAL

End

Configuration level

4.1 Configuration survey

4.2 Configuration

Cntr

InP.1

InP.2

Lim

Out.1

Out.2

Out.3

LOGI

othr

4.3 Set-point processing

4.4 Configuration examples

Parameter setting level

5.1 Parameter survey

5.2 Parameters

Cntr

SEtP

ProG

InP.1

InP.2

Lim

5.3 Input scaling

Calibration level

CAL)

Programmer

Timer

8.1 Setting up the timer

8.2 Determining the timer run-time

8.3 Starting the timer

BlueControl

Versions

Technical data